JP2019058517A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve a manner of displaying a start memory display area in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a display device capable of executing a performance related to a variation display game; performance game means capable of executing a performance game corresponding to the variation display game in the display device on the basis of satisfaction of a start condition; a specific display area which is displayed more preferentially than the performance game in the display device; and display control means capable of executing a display control of a specific character displayed in the specific display area. The display control means can display the specific display area in a first display mode in the normal state, display the specific character in a first performance mode, switch the specific display area to be in a second display mode different from the first display mode on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and switch the specific character to be in the second performance mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69A

Description

  The present invention executes a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a game capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player. About the machine.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine which displays a start storage display corresponding to a start storage which is an execution right of a variable display game in a start storage display area of a display device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2012-120867, A

  However, the start memory display area is displayed for a long time, and there is room for improvement in the display method.

  An object of the present invention is to improve the way of displaying a starting memory display area in a gaming machine.

  In one representative mode of the present invention, a special game is advantageous for the player when a variable display game is executed based on a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a state, a display device capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game, and an effect game capable of executing an effect game corresponding to the variable display game based on establishment of the start condition on the display device Means, a specific display area displayed on the display device with priority over the effect game, and a display control means capable of executing display control of a specific character displayed in the specific display area, the display The control means displays the specific display area in the first display mode in the normal state, and displays the specific character in the first effect mode, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. With switching to a different second display mode with the first display mode to the specific display area on the basis of a switchable said specific character in the second representation embodiment.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to improve the way of displaying the starting memory display area in the gaming machine.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a package display apparatus. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of an effect control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the game microcomputer of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of game state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of probability setting value change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of probability setting value confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting opening switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit judging processing. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game to each setting (each setting value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit design distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game vis-a-vis each setting. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of design change control processing. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a common drawing normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 2). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 3). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 4). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 5). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the package display apparatus in process of probability setting change (the 6). It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows another structure of a package display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch change type | system | group command processing. It is a flowchart which shows symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows big hit system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol setting processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the chance eye stop symbol aspect in the chance eye-reading effect concerning 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which selects the chance eye stop symbol aspect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a screen transition figure (the 1) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a screen transition figure (the 2) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a reverse view of the gaming machine concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a production control system of a game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view when the board production apparatus of the game board which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operate | moves. It is a front view when the frame effect device of the glass frame which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operate | moves. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the movable body control processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of timing of initial operation control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of timing of initial operation control processing concerning a comparative example of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the setting value reception which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a table for determining the light emission mode of the initial stage of setting suggestion effects of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare production setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion production of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ending production setting process which concerns on the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing at the time of out sphere number reception concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of RTC reading processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of count information setting processing concerning a 4th embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of becoming a big hit. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the display device at the time of a big hit in the fourth embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the display mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of hall / player setting mode processing concerning a 4th embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device in the hole setting mode in the fourth embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when it is in player setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demo setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series in the fifth embodiment, which is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the hold display during the special figure change of the hold region changes. In 5th Embodiment, it is a screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when a predetermined | prescribed effect is generate | occur | produced in a production | presentation display area. In the fifth embodiment, is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, another example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the reserve digestion area or the effect display area It is. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interrupt process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the character code (character code) concerning a 6th embodiment, and the character corresponding to it. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the initialization command and latch which are transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED driver initialization process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the LED command and latch which are transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. FIG. 78 is a view showing the details of the state display device according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 78 (A) is a view showing the details of the character ratio display unit that constitutes the state display device and displays the character ratio. FIG. 78 (B) is a view showing details of a discharged ball number display unit that configures the state display device and displays the discharged ball number and a pop rate display unit that displays the pop rate. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for the duty ratio according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment, and the driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the procedure of the initialization process of the driver for the duty ratio which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and the driver for ball ratio / ball number for discharge | emission. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for duty ratio concerning the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment, and the driver for ball ratio / ball number for discharge. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine concerning the 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for batch, the driver for duty ratio, and the driver for the ball out rate / the number of discharged balls according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of initial setting processing of a driver for package, a driver for ratio ratio, and a driver for ball out rate / discharge ball number according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for package, the driver for duty ratio, and the driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed from the player in the game.

[General view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable and pivotable via a hinge. The opening and closing frame is constituted by a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  While the game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that enables visual recognition of the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, access to the game control device (main substrate) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30 Can.

  Various frame components are disposed at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are disposed. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate therein illumination members such as LEDs, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members disposed inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper speaker 19a is disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19 b are provided below the gaming machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19 a. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds and the like.

  In the right side portion of the glass frame 15, a projection effect unit 13 which is extended in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and which protrudes toward the front (player side) is disposed. The projecting effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect and the like according to the progressing state of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).

  The upper unit further includes a rendering operation device for receiving an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device for receiving an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 for performing a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operating device is an operating device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

  By the player operating the effect operating device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special view variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select a rendering pattern (rendering mode) or to execute a preview rendering for previewing in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special view variable display game, and in the case where the variable display game is simply used, this specification refers to the special view variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operating device during the non-execution.

  The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific gaming state or a state where probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high in a variable display game (certain change state, probability change state) ), Small hitting game state (small hit state).

  Here, the definite change state (specific game state) is continued until the next big hit occurs (loop type), and is continued until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (count cut type, ST), and There are things (continuation lottery type) etc. which continue until it wins a predetermined probability fall lottery.

  Furthermore, it is possible to always generate a positive change state when a big hit occurs, without deciding whether or not to generate a positive change state by a big hit symbol random number, or by providing a winning device etc. provided with a specific area If the gaming ball passes through the area, a definite change state may be generated.

  The ball lending operating device is an operating device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operating device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is a card unit (not shown) disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10 for discharging a prepaid card or the like. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED, etc., and is a device that performs light emission effects and the like according to the game state, and is provided on the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball emitting device (not shown) and a gaming ball can be stored under the glass frame 15 provided with the above-described upper tray unit etc. and under the front frame 12 A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19 b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the gaming board 30. The firing speed of the gaming ball to be fired from the ball launching device is set to be faster as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 is larger. That is, the ball launcher can change the launch force (speed) for firing the game ball to the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game is performed in various launch modes with different launch rates. I can shoot a ball. The firing modes include a left strike (normal strike) in which the gaming ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and a right strike in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower tray 23 is disposed below the upper tray unit at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removing hole 23a penetrating the bottom of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an open / close operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball removing hole 23a. The player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, whereby the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Play board]
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10. FIG.

  As shown to FIG. 2A, the game board 30 is provided with the flat form game board main body 30a used as the attachment base of various members. The game board body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front of the game board body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launch device into a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31. A windmill, an obstacle nail or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached substantially at the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variation display device) that variably displays (variable display) a plurality of identification information is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is disposed such that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each of the variable display areas. In addition, an image (a big hit display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the gaming balls having passed the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. The stage portion 40 b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so the gaming balls rolled on the stage portion 40 b are the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It is easy to win a prize.

  An upper rendering unit 40c and a side rendering unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided. Inside the drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 32 passes the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 is disposed in the left lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also disposed in the right lower gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided on the general winning opening 35.

  The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special view variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 having a start winning area) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the gaming ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. When the movable member 37 b is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not normally win the fluctuation prize device 37. When the gaming ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special view variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called Vello-type ordinary motorized symbol, and is rotated via the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the common view variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is changed to the open state (the easy-to-win prize state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball is likely to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.

  The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control apparatus 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the common drawing fluctuation display game higher than usual, or the normal gaming state The time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state by lengthening the generation time of the easy-to-win state more than the easy-to-win state generated in. Even in the definite change state (except for the latent change), the short time state (general charge support state) occurs redundantly.

  In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the big winning opening is opened by turning the upper end side in the direction of falling to the front side by the big winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) A special fluctuation winning device 39 having an open / close door 39c is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the flow of gaming balls into the mouth, a predetermined gaming value (winning balls) is given to the player. In the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. In addition, in the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39 and in the vicinity of the special winning opening (around the special winning opening), one or more special winning opening LEDs 39d (full color LEDs) for illuminating the special winning opening are disposed. .

  When the game ball wins in the special winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) The number of prize balls corresponding to the number of balls is discharged from the dispenser to the upper tray 21. In addition, in the gaming area 32 below the normal change winning device 37, an out port 30b is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and the common drawing fluctuation display game are executed outside the gaming area 32 and in the lower right corner of the gaming board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. Batch display device 50 includes display portions 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 2B).

  FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the configuration of the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 is a first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special view fluctuation for a variable display game, which is configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), fluctuation display unit 53 for common drawing fluctuation display game (common drawing indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), start (pending) of each fluctuation display game And a storage display unit for informing the storage number (special view 1 suspension display 54, special view 2 suspension display 55, general drawing suspension display 56). The special view 1 suspension display 54 is constituted by lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is formed by lamp D13 and D14. The common view holding display 56 is constituted by the lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the first display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) informs the collective display device 50 that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally hit). D7), the second gaming status display unit 58 (second gaming status indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when the hour saving condition occurs (second gaming status indicator, lamp D17), probability of jackpot probability is high when powering on the gaming machine 10 Display the 3rd game state indicator 59 (3rd game state indicator, probability state indicator, lamp D9) to indicate that it is in the state, and the number of rounds at the big hit (number of opening and closing times of the special fluctuation winning device 39) A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

  In the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display which repeatedly turns on and off (flickers) identification information (for example, the central segment). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be comprised by the aggregate | assembly of not only such a segment type display part but several LED, and when performing a fluctuation display In addition, all the LEDs provided as a display all lights all lights off (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), cyclical lighting (lights on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time from any one LED), or plural It may be performed by lighting on / off (flickering) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the common map display 53, the variable display game is executed by the variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the common drawing indicator 53 can be appropriately configured similarly to the special view 1 indicator 51 and the special view 2 indicator 52.

  The lamp display device 80 executes lamp display portions 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (flashing) that repeats lighting display and light-off display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later) and start of each special view fluctuation display game (Holding) A lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying of the number of memories is provided. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display portions 1 and 2 blink in a predetermined blink cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the general display 53 of the collective display 50 is measured by the game control apparatus 100, the lamp of the lamp display 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp displays 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserve LED 1 and special figure 1 reserve LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserve number (the first start memory number) according to the combination of the light off state, the lighting state and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 reserve LED 1 and special figure 2 reserve LED 2) display the special figure 2 reserve number (second start memory number) by the combination of the light off state, lighting state and blinking state. Do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of reservations in cases other than in the big hit state (including the case where the reach described later occurs in the display device 41). Do.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, and the details of the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by striking a gaming ball from a ball launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, or the special fluctuation winning apparatus 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, or the special fluctuation winning device 39, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening won through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21.

  The common drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common drawing start gate 34. When the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the common drawing fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the hit judgment random number value extracted at this time.

  A state in which a common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, when a common drawing fluctuation display game has already been played and the common drawing fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and it is normal When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the gaming ball passes the common drawing start gate 34, the number of common drawing start memories is added (+1) if the number is lower than the upper limit number.

  A hit determination random number value is stored in the hit map start memory to determine hit hit of the hit game variation display game, and when the hit judgment random number value matches the decision value, the hit map change display is performed. The game is hit and a specific result aspect (specific result) is derived.

  The common drawing variation display game is executed by the common drawing indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The common drawing indicator 53 is composed of an LED which indicates a hit in the case of the lighting state as normal identification information (general drawing), and shows a deviation in the case of the light-off state, and this LED blinks to indicate fluctuation of the normal identification information. The display is performed, and the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed.

  When the common drawing random number value extracted at the time of passing the common drawing start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the common drawing display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the common voltage solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), and the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is Winning is acceptable.

  The winning on the starting winning opening 36 of the gaming ball and the winning on the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball winning in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball in the special view 1 variation display game, and is stored within the predetermined upper limit number, and the game ball winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is special figure 2 It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored within a predetermined upper limit number.

  When detecting the start winning balls of the special view variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special view reserve storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special view start winning storage, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, at a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special view start winning memory is displayed on the special view 1 hold display 54 or the special view 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start win number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display 41 Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special view 1 variation display game with the special view 1 display 51 based on the winning on the start winning hole 36 or the first start storage. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation display game with the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variation prize device 37 or the second start storage.

  The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identification information (special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52) It is carried out by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after changing and displaying the special symbol and the special figure). Further, in the display device 41, a decorative special view variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special view variation display game is executed.

  In the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numerals etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) The variable display (scroll display) is started in the order of d), and symbols which are changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped to display the result of the special figure change display game. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as the other decorative special symbols (identification information), in the lamp display portions 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is displayed repeatedly (flashing) on and off. fluctuate. The variable display of the lamp display portions 1 and 2 is stopped at a predetermined time after the start, at "off" in the case of outliers, and at "on" in the case of big hit or small hit.

  As a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the winning of the game ball to starting starting winning a prize opening 36 or normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is done at specified timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is big hit value) A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived by the display symbol, and becomes a big hit state (special game state). Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

  At this time, the special variation winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energization to the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens widely until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of gaming balls win, and during this time, a bonus is given that the player can acquire many gaming balls. Ru.

  When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hitting value), the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result aspect (small hit result aspect) is derived | led-out by display design as a result of, and it will be in a small hit state. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the big winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined short time by energization to the big winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, since the small hit state (small hit gaming state) is shorter than the big hit state (special gaming state), the entire opening time of the big winning opening is a game in which the player can obtain more than the big hit state in the small hit state. There is little value (the number of balls won). In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state, and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 39 continuously is set. If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special fluctuation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the small hitting flag is set, the special fluctuation winning device Is released.

  In addition, although the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be comprised as a separate display, and may be comprised as the same display, each special figure fluctuation display game is not performed simultaneously Is set as

  With regard to the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on different display devices or separate display areas, or the same indication It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the special-figure variation display game corresponding to the special-figure 1 variation display game and the special-figure 2 variation display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. The special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there are special figure 1 variation display games and start figures of the special figure 2 variation display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a special view change display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (39a ) Uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that has a coil for magnetic detection and detects gaming balls using the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. It is possible to use a microswitch having various contacts.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the game machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100 (main board), and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and is connected to a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). ), An input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It consists of etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock serving as an operation clock of the CPU, timer interrupts, and a random number generation circuit. Oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of lower levels such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a voltage of 32 V DC. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal notifying the game control apparatus 100 of the occurrence of power failure and recovery. And the like, and a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate substrate or gaming control device 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply 400 or the main board. By providing it, it can be removed from the target of replacement and the cost can be reduced.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 (main board) is turned on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like, and the setting key switch 93 for making it possible to change the set value regarding the game condition (game). And a setting value change switch 102 capable of changing the setting value relating to the game condition. In the present embodiment, the setting value regarding the game condition (game) is the probability setting value of the jackpot probability, but other game conditions (small hitting probability, probability change rush rate, etc.) other than the jackpot probability also depend on the probability setting value. It can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) regarding the gaming conditions. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as the determination signal for determining the set value, but the operable determination button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. The game control device 100 may be provided, and the signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the setting value.

  The setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 are provided on the game control apparatus 100 inside the gaming machine 10, and are arranged at positions (inaccessible positions) which can not be operated unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. Be done. That is, a general player can not access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided to be assembled on the game control apparatus 100, but the front frame 12 (body frame) is open such as on the power supply substrate of the power supply device 400. It may be provided at a position where it can not be accessed otherwise.

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the operator operates the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) By this, it is possible to change settings (setting values) regarding gaming conditions such as the probability of big hit and the probability change rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is the setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In the normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotates the setting key switch 93 to turn it on to turn on the power, the setting variable state corresponding to the setting change state is entered. The setting variable state may be notified by voice from the speaker. When power is turned on, the glass frame 15 may be opened and the setting key switch 93 may be turned on as the setting variable state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 may be opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be set to be settable.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values related to the game conditions are defined in six steps, setting value 1 (setting 1), setting value 2 (setting 2), setting value 3 (setting 3), setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). The setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and the setting value 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (middle setting), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

  In the setting value changing process, each time the operator operates the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button), the setting value (setting) is set value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting It changes and selects as value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 →. The setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value change button. Also, the setting value is not limited to six levels. Then, the selected setting values of 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment display. Note that the probability setting value display device 143 may change the display in direct interlock with the operation of the setting value change switch 102 via the electric circuit. As will be described later, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50 displays the selected setting values 1 to 6 It is also good.

  When a touch switch signal is input to the game control apparatus 100 by the operator touching the operation handle 24, the selected (changed) set value (ie, setting) is determined and the probability set value in the RWM (storage means) is determined. It is stored in the area, and the setting value change processing ends. It should be noted that regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after changing the setting value, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting variable state, the game control apparatus 100 determines and stores the setting value (ie setting). Configuration is also possible.

  On the other hand, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned to turn on from the off state after the game machine 10 is powered on, the setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set. In the setting value confirmation mode, the setting value displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 can be confirmed. You may display and confirm the setting value of 1 to 6 selected on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 for the variable display game of the collective display device 50. . The setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from the speaker.

  The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) can also be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), and initialization is performed when the initialization switch is in the on state at the time of power on (power recovery). A switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing is performed to forcibly initialize the information stored in the RAM 111 c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a random access memory (RAM) 111c which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a working area of the CPU 111a and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111 b or the RAM 111 c.

  Further, the ROM 111 b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display areas of all the variable display areas are temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle and right variable display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the state (1) except that the special result aspect is a reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect (big hit aspect) is different (expected values are different) as a line of reach effects, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. In addition, the degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit is designed to become higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is high as compared with the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit of the special pattern variation display game, a big hit random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number, etc. for determining a pattern random number, a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (including an execution time of the variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach) And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

  Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one fluctuation pattern table from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the fluctuation pattern tables among the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the rental ball request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for dispensing the rental balls.

  A radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the common view starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36 Connected to switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a in second start winning opening 37, winning opening switch 35a, special winning opening switch 39a of special variation winning device 39, the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and low level A negative logic signal such as 7V is input, and an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124 .

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123.

  In addition, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 in the second input port 123, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 A signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the switch 63 and the front frame 12 (main frame) or the like is input. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

  Also, the second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102 and Supply to 111.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the enable signal CE2 being asserted (changed to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout, and an overflow. The overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the out sphere detection switch signal from the out sphere detection switch are taken in and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 An input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 for a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame), and the payout busy signal is a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command It is a signal which shows whether or not. In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch (not shown) is for detecting all the game balls that have been fired to the game area and finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only gaming balls passing through the out port 30b.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for outputting to the test injection test device. Is configured as.

  In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test injection test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass the buffer. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 is opened / closed data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37 c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39 b opening the special fluctuation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

  The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability setting value display output port) for outputting information of the setting value (probability setting value) to the probability setting value display device 143. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment display (LED lamp), but the information of the setting value (probability setting value) is transmitted from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (LED driver). It may be output to the probability setting value display device 143 via

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the common power solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138c outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal 71. It is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply apparatus 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and the driver 150 for driving the status display device 152 It is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment types including point portions) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to

  The state display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main substrate), but may be provided in another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a four-digit seven-segment (including eight-segment type including a point portion) display, and can display an item ratio, a payout rate, and a discharge ball number. In addition, the status display device 152 is not limited to the one that directly displays the character ratio, the popping rate, and the number of discharged balls, but also indirectly displays the number of discharged balls, the popping rate, and the character ratio. Good. That is, the state display device 152 may be able to display information related to the character ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

  Here, the discharged ball number is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the out ball number), and the number of game balls passed through the winning opening (winning number) and the game passed through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of balls. The number of balls discharged is basically the same as the number of balls which is the number of gaming balls shot from the ball launcher to the game area 32. The number of discharged balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), Special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening) is included. The number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of discharged balls) is displayed, and only 100 (predetermined number) are counted. The number of discharged balls may be displayed by counting up from "00" to "99".

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of winning balls to the number of discharging balls (or the number of firing balls), and is calculated by (number of obtained balls / number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of obtained balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of winning balls).

  In the present embodiment, the pop-out rate is easily obtained from the number of acquired balls between 0 and 100 discharged balls every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is only counted up to 100 (predetermined number). In addition, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of balls) is displayed on the status display unit 152 as it is, the payout rate is displayed.

  For example, the character ratio is a big hit among the total number of balls (total number of balls) obtained by winning in the winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is a ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of winning balls (number of balls obtained by character) obtained by winning in the large winning opening. In addition, the prize ratio may be the ratio (= big winning opening ratio) of the number of winning balls (in big hit state and small hit state) obtained by winning in the big winning port among the total winning balls number Or the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the large winning opening and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= commonly used so-called prize ratio (total prize ratio) ) May be.

[Effect control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) will be described using FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights the decoration lamp, and the motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. A decoration control command signal (rendering command) such as a decoration special drawing reserve number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 via the command I / F 331 Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect). The panel decoration device 46 may include the above-described lamp display device 80.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, you may provide the frame production movable body control circuit which drive-controls frame production apparatuses, such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, a motor in the panel effect device 44 A function to detect the on / off state of the effect combination object switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting an initial position etc. and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to

  Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in to determine the hit / off of the common drawing fluctuation display game.

  Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the generic image fluctuation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a hit, the common drawing indicator displays a special result mode, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) control to open as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing display.

  In addition, starting winning combination (starting memory) is remembered on the basis of the input of detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 1 switch 36a which is equipped in starting winning a prize opening 36, big hit judgment of special figure 1 fluctuation indication game on the basis of starting memory The random number value for extraction is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 1 variation display game.

  In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 stores the starting memory, based on the starting memory, special figure 2 random display random number value of the fluctuation display game Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 2 variation display game.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, a special view fluctuation display game in which a stop display is performed is displayed. In other words, the game control means performs game progression control of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 I

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and generates the special gaming state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 second) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until a certain condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeatedly) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game) I do. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability state) is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed to set the regular drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the time shortening operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is more than when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. In order to control so that the open time of the subtractor increases substantially, it becomes a common charge support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the general-purpose power transmission support is executed in the short time state repeatedly.

  For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to reduce the time to make the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above (general drawing fluctuation time) a second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example, , 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shortened than usual, and time shortening fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

  Moreover, in the time saving state, the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game can be controlled to be a second stopping time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stopping time (for example, 1604 msec) It is.

  Also, in the time saving state, when the regular drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is released, the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) of the opening time (general power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) that is longer than that is obtained.

  Moreover, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game It is possible to set to the 2nd open frequency (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (popular drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time saving state, winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is facilitated more than in the normal gaming state, and the number of times of execution of the special view fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set so as not to open in the normal operation state (a common drawing probability is 0). In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started by turning on the power. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "A ****".

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the main processing is started, the gaming control apparatus 100 first executes processing for prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is performed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area for saving the values of the register etc. when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal of release prohibition and sets the release permission signal to a release state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). Thereby, the signals from the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, the glass frame open detection switch 63, and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) can be read.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). Program of secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer The standby time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the system starts up normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) boots up, and the slave control apparatus Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power supply delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3), and the standby time is set. By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102, the operation can be reliably detected. That is, when the state of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value changing switch 102 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 or the setting value changing switch 102 is operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 from the time of the standby time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a bothersome operation, and the setting key switch 93 performed at the time of the power on. It is possible to prevent a situation where the operation of the setting value change switch 102 can not be accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the counting of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus ( A1008) It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. It judges (A1010). Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks is not continued (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

  In addition, when the on state of the blackout monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the blackout has occurred, the gaming control apparatus 100 is a gaming machine. Wait until the power is turned off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when no power failure occurs, the game control device 100 updates the power on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control apparatus 100 can read and write RWM (read-write such as RAM or EEPROM). Memory access is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a serial port (a port provided in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control apparatus 300 and the payout control apparatus 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, the driver 150 for driving the status display device 152 is initialized (A1016).

  Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. Control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in a duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). The duty ratio of the driver 150 may be smaller than usual to save power and darken each LED. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits used of the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In the present embodiment, the number of used digits is four. Control data corresponding to the number of used digits is used in the number-of-digits setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the blackout inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power-off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM 111c is normal, and the RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

  FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111 c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear top address 2 is set so as to exclude the probability setting value area from the RAM area to be cleared. The RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C by the RAM clear top address 2. The clear area # 2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area includes an initial value random number area storing various initial value random numbers and a variation pattern random number area storing variation pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the blackout inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes a blackout inspection area 1, a blackout inspection area 2, a checksum area, and the like. The random number area may be excluded from the clear area # 2. The clear area # 2 includes a state display work area for storing information to be displayed on the state display device 152, such as a character ratio, and a state display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the state display device 152. I can not.

  In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area, and the game control stack area. In addition, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Further, the state display stack area may be disposed at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the last unused area (the bottom of FIG. 5C) of FIG. 5C may be eliminated.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state, the setting changing state) (A1022). When the probability setting change is in progress (the result of A 1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing in the probability setting change of step A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting change is in progress.

  When the probability setting change is not in progress (the result of A 1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the front frame 12 (main frame) is in an open state (A 1023). When a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 (main frame) is in the open state. In step A1023, it may be determined whether or not the glass frame 15 is in the open state instead of the front frame 12, or it may be determined whether or not both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in the open state. It is also good. In addition, when the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (result of A1023 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the setting (setting value) can be changed, so that the initial setting of the RAM in the setting variable state of step A1036-A1041 is possible. Executes the processing during conversion processing (RAM clear processing) and setting change.

  If the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state) (if the result of A1023 is "N"), or if the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1024 is “N”), it is determined whether the set value change switch 102 is on (A1025). When the setting value changing switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is "N"), the processing at the time of normal power on (power restoration) of step A1031-A1035 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the setting value change switch 102 is on (result of A1025 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 executes the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) of step A1042-A1045. Here, since the setting value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) when the power is turned on in the OFF state of the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102 is a RAM initialization switch ( It will be used as a RAM clear switch). In addition, in the closed state of the front frame 12 (the result of A1023 is "N"), there is not a situation where the setting value change switch 102 is turned on actually. The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, is an initialization operating unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM based on the initialization operation unit being operated. It is an initialization means to initialize data.

  In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N”, or the result of A1018 is “N”), the checksums do not match. There is an abnormality in the RAM 111c (the result of A1020 is “N”), and the process shifts to a process for coping with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear top address 1 is the top address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. The RAM area to be cleared is set to the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C by the RAM clear top address 1. The clear area # 1 includes a game control work area (consisting of a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area # 1 does not include a state display work area for storing information to be displayed on the state display device 152 and a state display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the state display device 152.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the front frame 12 (main frame) is in the open state (A1027). When a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

  When the front frame 12 is in the open state (the result of A1027 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1028 is “Y”), the setting changeable state where the setting value can be changed is possible. Therefore, the RAM initialization process in the setting changeable state of step A1036-A1041 ( Execute the RAM clear process and the process of changing settings. The RAM area to be cleared in the RAM initialization process in this case is the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated.

  If the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state) (if the result of A1027 is "N"), or if the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1028 is “N”), a command of setting change instruction to urge the player to change the setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). The effect control device 300 having received the command of setting change instruction displays on the display device 41 a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting. By the setting change instruction display, the setting key switch 93 is turned on in order for the player to change the setting (the result of A1028 is "Y"), and the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the setting change eliminates the RAM abnormality. it can.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes processing for prohibiting access to the RWM (A1030), and stands by until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  Next, processing at the time of normal power on (power restoration) of step A1031-A1035 will be described.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area # 2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) of FIG. 5C. Here, the control information area includes a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. After that, the game control apparatus 100 checks the area storing the gaming state in the RWM, and determines whether the gaming state is the high probability state (A1032).

  Here, when the gaming state is not in the high probability state (the result of A1032 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 skips the processing of step A1033 and step A1034, and shifts to the processing of step A1035. Also, if the gaming state is a high probability state (result of A1032 is "Y"), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033), for example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 50 The on (lighting) data of (the third gaming state display unit 59, error indicator) is saved in the segment area (A1034). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1035), step A1046 Transfer to processing.

  Next, the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in the setting variable state of the step A1036-A1041 and the process during the setting change will be described.

  The game control apparatus 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036). When the RAM 111 c is normal (the result of A 1020 is “Y”), the RAM area to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C because the RAM clear start address 2 is set. If the RAM 111 c is abnormal (the result of A 1020 is “N”), the RAM clear start address 1 is set, and thus the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C is obtained. That is, although the probability setting value area is not cleared when the RAM is normal, the probability setting value area is also cleared when the RAM is abnormal.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this point, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in the open state, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. Make it possible to output what has been done to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, the default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved as an initial value in the probability setting value area.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 sets a probability setting value change in progress flag indicating that the setting changeable state in which the setting change is possible (that is, the setting change is in progress) (A1038). Subsequently, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data at the time of changing the probability setting value (A1039), and the value of the probability setting value area is loaded. It is saved in the work probability setting value area as initial data at the time of change (A1040). Subsequently, the command in the probability setting change indicating that the setting variable state (during setting of the probability) is being transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and the process proceeds to step A1046. By the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the setting variable state (during the probability setting change).

  Next, the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in step A1042-A1045 will be described.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the RAM clear start address 2 (A1042), and clears the clear target RAM area to 0 (A1043). Since the clear top address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the probability setting value area is not cleared in the processing of the RAM initialization (the RAM clear) by the operation of the RAM initialization switch (the setting value change switch 102).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1045), and the process shifts to the process of step A1046.

  Note that the command for power failure recovery sent in the process of step A1035 and the command for RAM initialization sent in the process of step A1045 include a model specification command indicating the type of gaming machine, and the suspension of special views 1 and 2 The decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command and the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command which show the number, and the probability information command which shows the state of probability are included. In addition, depending on the state of power off or power on, if the special view variation display game is being executed at the time of power off, the recovery screen command, if it is waiting for the customer at power off, the customer waiting demo command And a power on command indicating that the power is on. Furthermore, a rendering mode information command indicating the state of the rendering mode, a rendering frequency information command, and a high probability frequency information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability status are included depending on the model. The command at the time of RAM initialization also includes a command for RAM initialization (a command for RAM clear). For example, the presentation control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command) displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM with the sound of the LED of the panel decoration device 46 or the like and the speaker (RAM Clear) for 30 seconds.

  Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of setting values (probability setting values) of the gaming machine 10 Be The gaming control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once at the time of restoration (turning on) of the power supply, and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. Effect control can be performed.

  After the processing of steps A1035, A1041 and A1045, the game control apparatus 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) as a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit. It starts (A1046). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1046, the gaming control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111a. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number to determine hit of common drawing (random number per hit), random number to determine hit symbol for common drawing (per symbol random number) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1048), and an interrupt is permitted (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, the gaming control apparatus 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number is the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is the processing unit of the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing).

  In the jackpot symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step A1050, the game control apparatus 100 sets the number of times of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus (A1051). It is determined whether the signal is on (A1052). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is "N"), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1050. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number update process (A1050), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initially performed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by being made to wait by the value random number update process. During the setting change (in the setting variable state), the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to the update of the initial value random number may not be performed.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing in step A1050, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is used in both. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. Rather, it has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is "Y"), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051. It is determined (A1053). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (the result of A1053 is "N"), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is inhibited (A1054), and off data is output to all output ports (A1055).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1056), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum at the time of power shutoff of the RWM (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control apparatus 100 first designates register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capturing of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). When the signal of emission prohibition is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the emission permission signal is output by the output processing being performed, and the emission permission signal is set to be in the permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes random number update processing 1 (A1305) and random number update processing 2 (A1306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating an initial value (start value) of a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, and a hit symbol random number which is an object of the initial value random number update processing. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Note that the random number updating process 1 and the random number updating process 2 may not be performed when the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state). Thereafter, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of errors (front frame or A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed to determine whether the glass frame is opened (A1307).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes probability setting value change processing for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed can be determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A1038). Next, it is determined whether or not probability setting confirmation is in progress (setting confirmation state) (A1310). When the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting confirmation is in progress.

  If the game control apparatus 100 is neither in the probability setting change nor in the probability setting confirmation (the result of A1310 is "N"), the payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 Execute (A1311). Furthermore, special figure game processing which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1312), and next, common drawing game processing which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is executed (A1313). Since the game control apparatus 100 does not need to change the probability setting (the result of A1309 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1310 is “Y”), the payout command transmission is performed. The processing (A1311), the special figure game processing (A1312), and the drawing game processing (A1313) are not executed, and the process shifts to the processing of step A1314.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes segment LED editing processing which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying special game variation game display and various information related to the game to display desired content. (A1314).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, when there is an abnormality, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region. Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, when there is an abnormality, the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag region.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes an external information editing process in which signals output to various external devices are set in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process is performed to edit and output the output data to the state display device 152 (A1318). In the state display editing output process, as the output data to the state display device 152, it is possible to calculate the character ratio, the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like. In the status display edit output process, the checksum of the status display work area is calculated at the time of power on (power recovery), and if it does not match the checksum at power off, the status display work area and the status display You may clear the stack area. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that although restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of specification of the register bank are performed automatically at the time of timer interrupt processing return, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after external information editing processing. It is also possible to carry out the processing to be performed and the processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1304) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). The acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output / external information output (A1606). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads and combines data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the release permission (A1610), and finally combines them. The data is output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (A1611).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets off output data of probability setting value display (A1612). The off output data is output data (blank data for turning off) during a period in which the probability setting value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in probability setting value changing processing described later.

  When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (result of A1613 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads probability setting value display data from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), The probability setting value display data is output to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141) (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (the result of A1613 is “N”), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the off output data is output to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141) Output (A 1615). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 Turns off (blank display).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (A1616). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (A1617).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 The synthesized data is output (A1618). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shooting tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( A1619). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (A1620), the output process ends.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 loads test signal output data of the probability setting value (A1621). Here, the display data itself of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment display), that is, the probability setting value display data of the probability setting value display data area is output as the test signal output data regarding the probability setting value. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing set values, or may be output data of another form. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1622 is "Y"), the loaded data and setting key switch on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data are output to test signal output port 6 (A1624) ). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1622 is "N"), the test signal output data of the probability setting value is output as it is to the test signal output port 6 (A1624).

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether probability setting change is in progress (setting variable state) (A2001). When the probability setting change is not in progress (the result of A 2001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting confirmation is in progress (in the setting confirmation state) (A 2002). If the probability setting check is not in progress (the result of A 2001 is “N”), the monitoring process from step A 2003 to A 2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting change is in progress (the result of A2001 is "Y") or when the probability setting confirmation is in progress (the result of A2002 is "Y"), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that the game ball can be manually put into any winning opening, and there is no point in performing monitoring processing etc., the monitoring processing etc. from step A 2003 to A 2010 are not executed, and the processing shifts to step A 2011. Do.

  When the probability setting change is not in progress (the result of A2001 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 is a prize corresponding to one of the big prize port switches 39a (two pieces) in the big prize port (special variation winning device 39). A mouth monitoring table 1 is prepared (A2003). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is an incorrect winning at the special winning opening and executes a fraud & prize monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (A2004).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the winning opening monitor table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2005). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor a fraudulent prize and to detect a proper prize (A2006).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2007). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor the fraud and to detect a proper prize (A2008). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch for which the fraud monitoring is unnecessary is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting opening 1 switch 36 a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35 a of the general winning opening 35.

  Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a winning number counter update process for updating the winning number (A2010). Then, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A 2013). The details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

  By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. 1) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (shoot ball out error) based on a shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormal status signal (dispense error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a monitoring state according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A2015).

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status (glass frame open error) based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch Is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state (frame radio wave improper) based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). Then, if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2016 is “N”), the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing is ended. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2016 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A 2017), and does an error occur, etc. The gaming machine state check process is executed to determine the state of (A2018).

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. (switch abnormality 2) Monitoring is set up. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes a payout busy signal check process of setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control apparatus 200 can start payout control (A2019) ), And finish the winning opening switch / status monitoring process.

  Since the processing from step A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, it is executed at a rate of once for four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 16 ms.

  In the fraud & prize monitoring process (A2008), the number of prizes and the number of winning balls per feature (total number of prize balls) for the special prize winning port (special variation prize winning device 39) and the normal variation prize winning device 37 are counted and stored. Further, information on the number of winnings and the number of balls acquired by character may be set as a rendering command. In the winning number counter update process (A2010), the winning number and winning ball number (total number of winning balls) for the starting winning hole 36 and the general winning hole 35 are counted and stored, and further, the winning number and bonus Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as a rendering command. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 8), the out ball detection switch counts and stores the out ball number (discharged ball number), and further, the out ball number information is a rendering command (out ball number command) May be set as The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of balls (the number of balls obtained for every role) to the number of discharged balls. The prize ratio is, for example, a ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of earned balls by prize) obtained by winning in the large winning prize port out of the total prize balls (= so-called continuous prize ratio) is there. In the state display edit output process (A1318), as the output data to the state display device 152, it is possible to calculate the combination rate, the ball out rate, the number of discharged balls and the like.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed at steps A2013, A2015 and A2018 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The status scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming status. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the signal to be checked is on (A2202). If the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2202 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, prepare a state off flag as a state flag (A2203), and obtain the state off command of the target And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a no touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires the state on command of the object, and prepares. (A2207). Furthermore, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a touch-on state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2205 or step A2208 is completed, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2212. If they do not match (the result of A2209 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2211).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212). Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the value of the updated state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is "N"), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1 and the timer comparison value − Stay at the value of 1 (A2214). Furthermore, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (the result of A2215 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. The rendering command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error system command, the effect control device 300 is made to start an error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Probability setting value change processing
Next, the details of the probability setting value changing process (A1308) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value change process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (setting variable state) (A2401). If the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is "N"), probability setting value confirmation processing for confirming the probability setting value is executed (A2402).

  When the probability setting value is being changed (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 if the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (A2403), and the probability setting value extinction timer is 0. It is determined whether or not (A2404). If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the process proceeds to step A2406. If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0 (the result of A2404 is “N”), nothing is performed, and the process shifts to the processing of step A2406.

  Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). The probability setting value has been changed when the probability setting value changed flag described later is set. When the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 is “Y”), the process of setting change end in steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

  When the probability setting value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (the result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2411.

  When there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the working probability setting value area by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A2408). Thus, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the value of the work probability setting value area is increased by one. When the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the work probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the work probability setting value area may return to 0. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to six levels of probability setting values 1 to 6. The probability setting value is not limited to six levels.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the operation probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to a light off period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off (blank display).

  As described above, when the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0, by setting the probability setting value display permission flag, the probability setting value display data is the probability as the probability setting value (work probability setting value) during setting change. It is displayed on the set value display device 143, and when the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is extinguished. The probability setting value extinguishing timer turns off only the predetermined extinguishing period after the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) is operated by the timer, so even if the setting is only one step (if the setting value is only 1) The probability setting value display device 143 can visually recognize that the setting value change switch 102 has been operated.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a touch switch signal from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). If there is no touch switch signal input (the result of A 2411 is “N”), the probability setting value change processing ends. When the touch switch signal is input (the result of A2411 is "Y"), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal is a determination signal for determining the setting value. Then, values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability setting value are stored in the probability setting value area.

  A configuration is also possible in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is turned off or when a predetermined time elapses after the setting variable state. In addition, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control apparatus 100, and a signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for fixing the set value. . That is, instead of the touch switch operation, the operation of the newly provided confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation operation.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2413). Thereby, the determined probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command of probability setting value change indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is the effect control device 300 (effect control To the substrate) (A2415), and the probability setting value change processing is terminated.

  In the process of setting change end in steps A 2416 to A 2421, the game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A 2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the on state (the result of A 2416 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process is ended. When the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the clear target RAM area is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area # 3 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and the probability setting value area and the random number area are excluded. The clear area # 3 is obtained by removing the random number area from the clear area # 2, and the random number updated during the setting change is not wasted. Clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0 clears the information and flags used to change the settings, such as the information for the working probability setting value area, the probability setting value changing flag, and the probability setting value changed flag. Ru.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). In addition, since it is at the end of the setting change, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. Enable output to a computer etc.). Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). Thereby, the probability setting value at the time of the end of the setting change is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 and maintained.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control apparatus 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and returns to the main processing (FIG. 5B), It transfers to the process of step A1049. The commands to be transmitted here are the model specification command described above, the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command, the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command, the probability information command, the setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and the probability setting change end Command (RAM initialization command may be used). Depending on the model, a rendering mode information command, a rendering frequency information command, and a high probability frequency information command are transmitted. The presentation control device 300 that has received the command to finish changing the probability setting, for example, displays a waiting for customer demonstration on the display device 41, and notifies of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the panel decoration device 46 etc. and the speaker. Do for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value confirmation process (A2402) in the above-described probability setting value changing process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation enabled state) which is the mode in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (A 2501). When the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. When in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A 2501 is “Y”), the processing of step A 2509 and subsequent steps is executed.

  When not in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A 2501 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 clears the probability setting value display permission flag (A 2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (A 2503). For example, if the variable display game is in progress or in the big hit state, it can be determined that the game is in progress. If the game is in progress (the result of A 2503 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended in order to make confirmation of the probability setting value impossible. If the game is not in progress (the result of A2503 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A2504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A 2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended.

  When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A 2504 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets a probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag (A 2505). As a result, when the probability setting value is not being changed (setting variable state) (when the result of A2401 is "N"), if the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value can be confirmed ( The set value can be checked). Subsequently, a probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506). Thereby, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output process (FIG. 7).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area to enable the output of the security signal (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and it is possible to output the fact that the front frame 12 is opened or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer). The command under confirmation of the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended.

  When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (the result of A 2501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A 2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation mode is continued, and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation processing is ended.

  When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A2509 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. Then, in order to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command for ending the probability setting value confirmation indicating that the probability setting value confirmation has ended is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A 2512).

  Although the set value change switch 102 is configured to be usable also as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch) in the above description, a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the set value change switch 102. In this case, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on at power on (power recovery), the setting variable state (setting change state) is set, and the setting key switch 93 is on and the RAM initialization switch is on. If it is off, the setting confirmation state (setting value confirmation enabled state) is set. If the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, RAM initialization (RAM clear) becomes possible, and the setting key switch 93 and RAM If the initialization switch is off, it may be configured to be in a normal power on (power recovery) state. Furthermore, the setting value (setting) may be determined when the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first executes start opening switch monitoring processing for monitoring winning of the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, and the special drawing fluctuation display based on the winnings A game result pre-determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the game. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the gaming ball with the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the special-purpose game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (subtracts 1) (A 2603). The special view game processing timer is clocked by an interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 updating. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), it moves to the processing of step A2619.

  The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game process number when the special figure game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already been up. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in a register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call according to the special figure game process number is made, and the game branching process according to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game, and sets the start of fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game, setting of the effect, Special figure normal processing is executed to set information required to perform special figure variation processing (A2608). The details of the special view ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the stop display time of the special view, sets the information necessary for performing the special view display process, etc. The process during the figure fluctuation is executed (A2609). The details of the special figure variation in-progress process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number of the game control number 100 is “2” in step A2607, if the game result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the game control apparatus 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, and each big hit The special figure display process is executed to set the fan fare time in accordance with the special winning opening pattern, and to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process (A2610). For example, in the special view display process, if the result of the special view variation display game is a big hit, set necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (render command), a big hit fanfare time, a probability information command (low probability), The processing number "3" related to the fanfare / in-interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special view variation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as small hit fanfare command (render command) and small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing Save to the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process. The fanfare / interval processing for setting etc. is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare / interval process, necessary information such as a round command (rendering command) corresponding to a round of round game to be executed and an opening time of a big winning opening is set, and a processing number related to a big winning opening opening process. Set "4" and save in the special figure game process number area.

  If the game processing number is “4” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the big round is the final round, A special winning opening open processing is performed to set information required to perform the special winning opening residual ball processing (A2612). For example, in the special winning opening open process, set necessary information such as interval command and ending command as a production command, set the processing number "5" related to the special winning opening residual ball processing, and set the special figure game processing number area Save to

  If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets a time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process (A2613). For example, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / in-interval processing is set to the special figure game processing number area Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "6" related to the big hit end process is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a big hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special view routine process (A2614). For example, in the big hit end processing, the necessary information such as the probability state after the big hit state end and the general charge support state (short time state) after the big hit state is set, and the probability state and time short state etc. It sets as a command), sets the process number "0" which concerns on a special figure normal process, and it saves in a special figure game process number area | region. The probability information command includes the probability state after the big hit state end (high probability / low probability), and the number of continued games in the general charge support state (short time state) after the big hit state (time reduction fluctuation number, number of times of power support) Information etc. is included.

  When the game processing number is "7" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the small hit, etc. Perform a small hit fanfare medium process (A2615). For example, in the small hit fanfare medium process, necessary information such as the small hit opening time of the big winning opening is set, and the process number "8" related to the small hit middle process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

  When the game processing number is “8” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hitting middle process for setting information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball process (A2616). For example, in small hit middle processing, necessary information such as small hit remaining ball processing time is set, and processing number "9" concerning big winning opening remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “9” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes small hit remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing small hit end processing (A2617). For example, in the small hit residual ball processing, necessary information such as a small hit ending time is set, a processing number "10" related to the special figure small hit end processing is set, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is saved.

  When the game processing number is "10" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes small hitting end processing for setting information necessary for executing the special view ordinary processing (A2618).

  When the processing based on the special view game process number is completed, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a special view 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (A2619), and then the special view 1 display The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control processing concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol change control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special view game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A 2701), executes hard random number acquisition processing (A 2702), and determines whether there is a winning for the starting winning opening 36 It is determined (A2703). If there is no winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, when there is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is in the short (in the general power support state) (A2704).

  When it is determined that the special control time is not in the middle (in the power transmission support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A2707 and thereafter. On the other hand, if it is in the special view time short (during general power support state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A2705), and rendering command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the case of the universal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. . In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the driver hits the start winning opening 36 left, and does not win the normal fluctuation prize device 37 unless the driver hits the right. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the common view start gate 34 unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the general electric power support state (time saving state), right-handed driving is more advantageous than left-hand driving, but there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the general electric power support state (that is, (In the case of left-handed), the right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing the right-handed operation by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special view start port switch common process (A2708). Then, a prize monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hard random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning for the second starting winning opening It is determined (A2711). If there is no winning on the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is a winning on the second start winning opening (result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is activated to be in an open state where winning of the gaming ball is possible (A2712). If the ordinary motor-operated combination is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process shifts to the processing of step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary motorized role is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the common electric charge is in progress (A2713). If the number of incorrect winnings on the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the general electric power is in the process of being created. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball is in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a game ball which has won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of incorrect prizes. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  After the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) when the common electric power fraud is not occurring (result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) The special view starting opening switch common processing is executed (A2715), and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Also, when it is determined in A2713 that a common power charge is in progress (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view starting opening switch common process. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  The game control apparatus 100 first outputs the information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36 a and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of starting opening signal outputs is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (A2904), and the process shifts to processing of step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is performed. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of to-be-updated special views (number of starting memories) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit. It is determined (A2905). If the number of to-be-updated special views is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special view starting port switch common processing is ended. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special views is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of to-be-updated special views (to-special number 1 or special number 2) is updated by 1 Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2914 ).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special view holding information determination process (A2916). Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the number of special view reservations as a rendering command (A2917), execute the rendering command setting process (A2918), and common to the special view starting opening switch. End the process.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the start winning area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit as start storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view holding information determination process (A2916) in the starting opening switch common process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special map hold information determination process. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetching (pre-judging) process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907, and determines whether or not it is a winning to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3001). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during the general electric support state) (A3002).

  If the special control time is short (in the power transmission support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the special view hold information determination process. On the other hand, when the special drawing time is not in progress (the result of A3002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is in progress (A3003). If the jackpot is medium or small (medium as a result of A 3003 is “Y”), the processing for determining the special feature reservation information ends.

  On the other hand, when the big game control device 100 is not in the big hit medium or small hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), the big hit decision processing which decides whether it is the big hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit decision value. Is executed (A3004). Then, if the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is "Y"), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (A3006), and in the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of out is set (A3013), it moves to the processing of step A3014.

  When it is a winning to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether it is a small hit by whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not The hit determination processing is executed (A3009). Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is "N"), stop symbol information of the outset is set (A3013), and the process shifts to the process of step A3014. On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. Information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a rendering command a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to a target starting opening switch and stop symbol information (A3014), and executes a rendering command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed (A3016), and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017) ).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a performance command a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a first half fluctuation number indicating a first half fluctuation pattern and a second half fluctuation number indicating a second half fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation pattern of a special figure fluctuation display game (A3018 ), The rendering command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special map hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Etc.) make a pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being processed (A3101). When the special winning opening open process is being performed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process moves to the process of step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is "N"), the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress. It determines (A3102).

  When the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A3105. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (the result of A3105 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, the small hit is being processed. (A3103). When the small hitting medium is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to the process of step A3105. If the small hit is not being processed (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

  When the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. If the small hit residual sphere process is being performed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to a process of step A3105. Then, 0 is set to the winning counter (A3105), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one large winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110). When the special winning opening switch 1 is input (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a special winning opening count command is prepared as a rendering command (A3107), and a rendering command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). When the special winning opening switch 2 has an input (the result of A3110 is "Y"), the special winning opening count command is prepared as a rendering command (A3111), and a rendering command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (A3115). If the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (the result of A3115 is "Y"), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3115 is "N") It is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

  If the game control device 100 is in the small hit residual ball processing (result of A3116 is "Y"), the large winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, if the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is " N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the large winning opening count number (A3117), the large winning opening count is the upper limit value (the number of gaming balls that can be winning in one round. For example," 9 " ) Is judged (A3118).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is "Y"), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether the small hit is being processed (A3121).

  If the game control device 100 is not processing during the small hit (the result of A 3121 is “N”), the big winning hole switch monitoring processing is ended, and when processing during the small hit is in progress (the result of A 3121 is “Y”) The value of the small hit opening end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the number of special views 2 reservations (the second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is 0 or not (A3205). Then, when the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is judged whether or not the customer waiting demo is started (A3209), and the customer waiting demo is not started (A3209) The result of “N” sets a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (state waiting for a customer demonstration) is in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a rendering command (A3211), performs rendering command setting processing (A3212), and sets "0" related to the special processing routine processing as the processing number ( A3213). On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has been started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" relating to the special processing is also set as the processing number (A3213). Thereafter, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special view routine processing is ended.

  Thus, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special drawing 1 holding number (first start memory number) and the special drawing 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The effect control device 300 performs setting for displaying the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control apparatus 100 may be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is an off signal.

  In addition, when special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is N), game control control 100 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202), the special feature 2 which corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number A figure reserve number command (decorative special figure 2 reserve number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), an effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

  In addition, when special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), game control control 100 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3206), the special feature 1 which corresponds to special figure 1 reservation number A figure reserve number command (decorative special figure 1 reserve number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), an effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special view normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 change start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure information setting process of setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405 ). After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3406).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process of setting information on the fluctuation start of the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special view 1 fluctuation start process. In the variation start information setting process, the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired, and saved in the special view game processing timer area. Then, with regard to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is prepared as a rendering command, and the effect command setting processing is performed.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 sets "1" related to the special figure variation process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, save the in-fluctuation flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and start the blink control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blink period timer) initial value (for example, special figure 1 blink control timer area) 100 ms) is set (A 3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 2 change start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information) (A 3503). Further, special drawing information setting processing for setting special drawing information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern of the special view 2 fluctuation display game (A3506). And the fluctuation start information setting processing which sets the information of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game is executed (A3507). In the variation start information setting process, the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired, and saved in the special view game processing timer area. Then, with regard to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is prepared as the effect command, and the effect command setting processing is performed.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 first sets "1" related to the special figure variation process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A 3512), and in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area, an initial value (for example, a timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) 100 ms) is set (A 3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special view 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves the misplacement information in the small hit flag area (A3601), and saves the misplacement information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A 3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3604). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3605).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is "N"), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value The small hit determination processing to determine whether or not is executed (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 is set while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. End the process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 1 variable display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deterioration”.
[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this processing, processing similar to the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 20 is performed for the second start storage.

  First, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves shift information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (A 3702), the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3703). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3704).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706), and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the big hit flag 2 is saved. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special view suspension information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a table (upper limit determination value table) of upper limit determination values corresponding to the probability setting value (A3801). The upper limit determination value table is for determining the upper limit determination value according to the probability setting value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (A3802), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (A3803). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A3803 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets out (other than the jackpot) as the judgment result (A3808), and ends the jackpot judgment processing. Do.

  Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the occurrence probability of the big hit is a high probability state (probability state). (A3804). Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A3804 is "Y"), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit judgment value table (A3805). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3804 is “N”), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit judgment value table (A3806).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3807). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is "N"), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hitting determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special view suspension information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a small hitting upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3901). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A 3902). Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit.

  Naturally, the range of small hit judgment values (between the small hit lower judgment value and the small hit upper judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not uniquely provided, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination, but a unique small hit random number may be provided.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets a gap as a judgment result (A3904), small hit The determination process ends.

  In addition, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A3902 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100, the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judged value It is determined whether it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "Y"), a gap is set as a judgment result (A3904). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "N"), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is ended.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
24 (A) (B) (C) show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit judgment processing (FIG. 22) and the small hit judgment processing (FIG. 23). It is a table illustrated to each setting (each setting value).

  The example of FIG. 24A shows the case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (at the low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (the higher setting), and the larger the set value, the more likely a big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 by the range of the value of the big hit random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the jackpot random number according to the set value in addition to the upper limit judgment value. Alternatively, only one of the low probability big hit probability and the high probability big hit probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases. By changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (set value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (set values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (set values 4, 5, 6) are the same. It is set. In the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability become higher as the setting value becomes larger (the setting becomes higher). In the example of FIG. 24 (B), it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability than in the case of FIG. 24 (A), and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

  In the example of FIG. 24C, the big hit probability (the low probability time and the high probability time) and the small hit probability are the same regardless of the setting (the set value). In this case, the player estimates the setting (setting value) from other setting determination elements.

  Other setting discriminator elements include a probability change rush rate (described later), the number of continuation of general support after a big hit (described later), the number of continued definite change conditions in the ST machine, the number of big hit rounds (round number upper limit), There are a variation pattern (variation time value) of the figure variation display game, various kinds of time (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.) set in the special figure game processing. The player can estimate the setting value from the setting discriminator by changing the probability that the predetermined content of the setting discriminator is selected for each setting value.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001). If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

  Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the time shortening determination data area (A4008). The time shortening determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general-purpose power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares an ornament special drawing 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode shift information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A 4001 is “Y”) and is used in the big hit end process. That is, it is possible to shift the effect mode on the occasion of a big hit by the effect mode shift information. In addition, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the stop pattern pattern of the big hit (probable variation big hit symbol / normal big hit pattern or not etc), so the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit), big hit end The transition destination of the effect mode to be shifted later will change. Further, since the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the transition destination of the effect mode is also influenced by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability change state) is currently in progress.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and a small hit (a result of A4011). "Y"), small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode shift information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A 4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted in response to a small hit. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016) and the off stop symbol pattern is stopped symbol pattern Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4020). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4021), clear 0 of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4022), and special figure 1 small hit The symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A 3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101). If it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 pending) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (A4102). Next, special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
It saves in the time shortening judgment data area (A4108). The time shortening determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general-purpose power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A 4101 is “Y”) and is used in the big hit end process. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A 4101 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A 4110) and the disconnection stop symbol pattern Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4114). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4115) and clear 0 of the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4116) and the special figure 2 stop symbol End the setting process.

[An example of special figure big hit design allotment]
FIG. 27 is a table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special view variation display game controlled by the special view game process described above, for each setting.

  FIG. 27 illustrates a jackpot symbol number 1 to 6 (stop symbol number) indicating the type of jackpot and a jackpot symbol table defining the distribution ratio for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol number (type of jackpot, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value), and the probability change rush rate becomes higher as the set value becomes larger. It is advantageous. In addition, a probability change rush rate is a ratio in which the probability change big hit symbol which the probability state after the big hit ends becomes high probability to all the symbols. In addition, the number of times of general support after the big hit ends is larger as the setting value is larger in settings 1 to 3 or 4 to 6, especially with respect to the normal big hit (the probability state after the big hit is low probability) growing. The number of times of generalization support of setting 1, 2, 3 (setting value 1, 2, 3) and setting 4, 5, 6 (setting value 4, 5, 6) is set to be the same. In addition, in the ST machine, a configuration is also possible in which the number of continuations of the probability change state increases as the set value increases.

  Further, in FIG. 27, although the number of rounds (round number upper limit values, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given at one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, the round number is increased as the set value increases. Configurations are also possible. Further, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds larger than the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game is more easily given to the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game is the special figure The player is more advantageous than the variable display game.

  In addition, the structure which makes big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) the same is possible similarly to FIG. 24 (C) irrespective of setting (set value).

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to a symbol in motion as a rendering command (A4701), and executes a rendering command setting process. (A4702). The symbol during variation can be determined from the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). The effect control device 300 having received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decoration special figure variation display game (the decoration special figure 1 variation display game or the decoration special figure 2 variation display game).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A 4703), and saves the set display time in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A 4704). In the case of this embodiment, in the case where the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, and a small hit symbol pattern, 600 msec is commonly set as the display time.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process number "2" related to the special figure display process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707) A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) to a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the execution frequency of the special view variation display game to the external information terminal. Save (A4709).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 controls the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop at the special view 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51. Save (A4710). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag area (A4711) , Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 29 shows symbol variation control processing (A2620, A2622) in the special drawing game processing described above, and symbol variation control processing in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process controls the variation of the special symbol (first special figure, second special figure, etc.) and the ordinary symbol (common figure) of the variation display game in the variation display part of the collective display 50, and the special symbol and ordinary It is a process which sets up the display data of a design.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether or not the fluctuation control flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special drawing, the second special drawing, and the common drawing) is fluctuating (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

  The game control apparatus 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A 7503) when the variation flag according to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (the result of A7502 is "Y"). ). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation, display table 1) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the blink control timer to be controlled by -1 (A 7504), determines whether the blink control timer after the update is 0 (A 7505), and the blink control timer after the update When it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), the display data which corresponds to the value of the fluctuation design number territory of control object is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  If the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (A7506), and the fluctuation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled. (A 7509). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blinking control timer initial value. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A7508 and A7511, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variation symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

  By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the regular game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the common-play game process. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  The game control device 100 first executes gate switch monitoring processing for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the −1 by subtracting 1 by subtracting 1 from the common game processing timer (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the common-play game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

  If the value of the common-play game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 A common drawing game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding processing is set in the register (A7605).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the common drawing game processing number based on the set common drawing game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call according to the common drawing game processing number is made, and a game branching process corresponding to the common drawing game processing number is executed (A7607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the common view change display game, and sets the start of change of the common view change display game and sets the effect, The common drawing routine processing for setting the information necessary for performing the common drawing fluctuation processing is executed (A7608). The details of the common drawing routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game processing number is “1” in step A 7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general-diagram changing processing that performs setting of information necessary for performing the general-diagram display processing ((1) A7609). For example, in the common drawing fluctuating process, in order to shift to the common drawing display processing, “2” is set as the game processing number and saved in the common drawing game processing number area, and the common drawing display time is common drawing game Save to processing timer area.

  When the game processing number is "2" at step A7607, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit, the game control apparatus 100 performs the common power according to whether or not the time saving state is in progress. The general drawing display processing is executed to set the open time, set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing (A 7610). For example, in the process of displaying the common drawing, when the result of the common drawing variation display game is hit, in order to shift to the processing during the common drawing, "3" is set as the game processing number and the common drawing game processing number area On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the common processing routine processing, “0” is set as the game processing number and saved in the common processing game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 generally continues processing during a general drawing, or performs setting of information necessary for performing a general electric residual ball processing, etc. The process is executed during each drawing (A7611). For example, in the middle processing per flat drawing, after setting for opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, “4” is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the general electric remaining ball processing It saves in the common drawing game processing number area.

  Further, when the game processing number is “4” in step A 7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes generalization residual ball processing to set information necessary for performing end processing per common drawing (A 7612) ). For example, in the routine play residual ball processing, in order to shift to finish processing per common drawing, in addition to setting “5” as the game processing number and saving it in the regular drawing game processing number area, the general drawing ending time Save to processing timer area.

  In addition, when the game processing number is “5” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the end processing per common drawing, which performs setting of information necessary for performing the common processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing per common drawing, “0” is set as the game processing number and saved in the general drawing game processing number area in order to shift to the normal processing per common drawing.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 53 is executed (A7615), and the common drawing game process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the common-play game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the common-play game process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input on the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is a game state in which the player strikes the right (A7702). The game state to hit right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a short time state (general power support state). If it is in the gaming state in which the player strikes the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process shifts to the processing of step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed command notification command (left-handed command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed command notification command executes, using the display device 41 or the like, a notification (warning) instructing to hit the left.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 acquires the common drawing reservation number and determines whether the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A 7705). When the common drawing reserve number is less than the upper limit (the result of A 7705 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the common drawing reserve number by +1 (A 7706), and corresponds to the updated common drawing reserve number. The address of the random number storage area is calculated (A7707). The random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (A7708), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is " N "), end the gate switch monitoring process.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (A 7608) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a procedure of common processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the number of lay figures held is 0 (A7901). If the general drawing reservation number is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the random number is loaded from the RWM random drawing storage area per common drawing (for the number of holdings 1), and the RWM common drawing random number storage area per common drawing A hit symbol random number is loaded from (for holding number 1), and a random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common drawing after loading and a symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common drawing are cleared to 0 (A7902 ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that the hit result will be hit in the common drawing variation display game is during the common drawing high probability (high probability state) higher than normal, ie, it is a short time state (general power support state) It is determined (A7903). Note that the probability per spread in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per spread in the low probability is 0/251.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is not in the common drawing high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower judgment value in the common drawing low probability (A7904) If the standard drawing high probability is in progress (the result of A7903 is “Y”), a high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is a lower judgment value in the general drawing high probability is set (A7905). Transfer to processing.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common to the medium and low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to the processing of step A7908. If the per-random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the per-random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

  If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A 7907 is “Y”), that is, if the hit random number is out, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A 7908). Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the common view stop symbol number (A7909), the out-of-shape symbol information is saved in the common view stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

  If the random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A7907 is "N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7911) and loads the hit symbol random number. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7912), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In addition, there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in the present embodiment.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number in the common drawing stop symbol area (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shifts the random number storage area per common drawing (A7916) After clearing the empty area after shift to 0 (A7917), the number of general drawing reservations is updated by -1 (A7918).

  That is, when the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 is executed, the rankings of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by common drawing reservation number 1 or later are advanced one by one. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the common game processing timer area (A7920). For example, the fluctuation time is distributed to 500 msec with probability 200/256, 1500 msec with probability 40/256, and 3000 msec with probability 16/256. Then, the processing shift setting processing during the general drawing variation is executed (A7921), and the general drawing normal processing is ended. For example, in the common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, “1” is set as the process number for shifting to the common drawing fluctuating process, and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game process number area. Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator is saved in the common drawing blinking control timer area, and the initial value (0 here) in the common drawing fluctuation symbol number area Save

  In addition, when the number of block diagrams reserved number is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as a process number for shifting to the general diagram process (A7922) The processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (A7923). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the external information editing process. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information based on the monitoring result in payout command transmission process (A1311), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (A1307), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316) Information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game arcade internal control device or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether the main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). If the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), the off data of security signal is external information output data Save to area (A9504).

  If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”), or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 is a door and a door. The on data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After steps A9504 and A9506, if the security signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (A9507), and it is determined whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up or not). It judges (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or when the setting change is completed, for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). (Main processing A1044, A2419). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization and the end of setting change. The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the setting variable state (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered by the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 The main processing A1037, A2507), the probability setting value changing flag is set, the setting is being changed (setting variable state), or the probability setting value confirmation mode is in the setting confirmation state, the security signal is set. You may output it all the time. Note that the security signal control timer is set to 0 and the output of the security signal is not set when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418) but when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414). A configuration that terminates is also possible.

  If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and shifts to the processing of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). When the magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether board radio fraud is occurring (A9511). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

  When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A 9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether a general electric power fraud is occurring (A 9513). If the common use fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether a big winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). It should be noted that if the incorrect winning occurrence flag for the special winning opening is saved in the incorrect flag area by the incorrect & prize monitoring process, it can be determined that the special winning opening is in progress. If the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a switch malfunction error is occurring (A9515).

  When a switch abnormality error (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as disconnection of a switch is occurring (result of A9515 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 tests the off data of the gaming machine error state signal Save to the output data area (A9516). If a switch abnormal error is occurring (the result of A9515 is "Y"), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 generates a frame radio wave irregularity when a magnet fraud is occurring (result of A9510 is “Y”) and a board radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9511 is “Y”) Medium (if the result of A9512 is "Y"), if the general electric power fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y"), or if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is " Y "), save the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9517), and save the on data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9518). By setting the on data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control apparatus 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes start opening signal editing processing for editing the winning combination signal of the start opening (A9520).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game if it is not 0, thereby updating -1 (A 9521). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (A 9522). When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A 9522 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is external information output data Save to the area (A 9523), and complete the external information editing process.

  In addition, if the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not 0 (the result of A 9522 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the game control device 100 turns on data of the symbol determination frequency signal to external information Save in the output data area (A9524), and complete the external information editing process.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the batch display device 50 during probability setting change (during setting changeable state where setting change is possible), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-D18) of the batch display device 50. It is a figure explaining the light emission aspect (the aspect of lighting / light extinction) of.

  During the probability setting change, the game control apparatus 100 displays a predetermined display for the special view fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 regardless of the state (such as the gaming state) of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power shutoff before power on. Are displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of FIG. For example, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 collectively displays the predetermined display regardless of the power off state of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change. It can be displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of the display device 50. Therefore, during the probability setting change (setting variable state), the probability setting change is being performed by the predetermined display on the display portions 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game which is easily viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 can not play a game (for example, a variable display game).

  In FIG. 34A, during probability setting change (setting variable state), the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special view 1 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 is predetermined. The probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed as the display. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can not play a game (for example, a variation display game) by displaying the first special figure variation display unit 51 with a different display (a different display from the normal) during the probability setting change. Can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10. In the stop display of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 when the fluctuation is stopped, the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value are not used.

  For example, the gaming control apparatus 100 may select the third output port 135 and the third output port 135 based on probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the working probability setting value or probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value. The output data may be output to the 4 output port 136, and the working probability setting value or the probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) (A 1603 of output processing) A1608).

  The probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the second special view variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special view 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50. In addition, the probability setting value may be lit or blinked using both of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52.

  Furthermore, even if the brightness setting value is weaker than normal and the probability setting value is lighted or blinked so that a person who is not authorized to change the setting may not easily recognize the probability setting value at a place away from the gaming machine 10 Good.

  In FIG. 34B, during the probability setting change, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) displays, as a predetermined display, an information indicating that the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) in-progress information display (For example, the letter "P") is displayed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the gaming machine 10 can not play a game by displaying the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 with a different display (display different from the normal time) during the probability setting change. It can be clearly stated in front of ten. In addition, in the stop display at the time of the change stop of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52, the same identification information (special symbol) as the information display during change (for example, the character It shall be.

  For example, when it is determined that the game control apparatus 100 is changing the probability setting (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the output data regarding the information display during change to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 10 may be executed (the processing step is added to FIG. 10), and the information display during change may be lit or blinked on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of the output processing). Also, for example, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the information display during change is lit or blinked on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). May be

  Note that the in-modification information display may be lit or blinked on the second special view variation display unit 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special view 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50. In addition, the information display during change may be lit or blinked by using both the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52.

  In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 displays, as a predetermined display, the same display as the result of stopping the fluctuation display game other than the special result (other than the big hit). . In the present embodiment, the out result (inout symbol) is a display in which the central segment of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) lights up. As described above, by performing predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 while changing the probability setting, it can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. In addition, the RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but the initial result of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 is displayed by displaying the out-of-set result (outlying symbol) from under probability setting change. The value setting (A2419) may not be necessary.

  For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the result of the disconnection to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 (the disconnection symbol) A process of generating output data relating to display may be executed (a processing step may be added to FIG. 10), and the display of the outlier result may be lit and displayed on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of output processing) . Also, for example, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the outlier result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) .

  The second special view variation display unit 52 (LED lamp D2) for the special view 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may display a display of the off result as lighting. Further, the display of the outlier result may be lit and displayed using both of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special drawing fluctuation display unit 52.

  In FIG. 34D, the light-off display is displayed as the predetermined display on the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) during the probability setting change. As described above, the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the gaming machine 10 can not play a game by displaying the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 with a different display (display different from the normal time) during the probability setting change. It can be clearly stated in front of ten. In the stop display of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 when the fluctuation is stopped, the light off display is not used.

  For example, the game control apparatus 100 may change the probability setting value from power on (power recovery) to a change (the result of A2406 is "Y"), and the first special feature to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. The output data for the figure fluctuation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the light-off display may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51.

  The second special view variation display unit 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special view 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off. Also, the display may be turned off in both of the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52.

  In FIGS. 34A to 34D described above, the LED lamps (for example, the LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display portions 51 and 52 (D1 and D2) for the special figure variation display game are turned off during the probability setting change. You may display the animation by lighting it cyclically.

  In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, as the predetermined display, all the display parts (that is, all the light emitting parts: LED lamps D1-D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked during the probability setting change. The all-lighting display or the all-flashing display is displayed on the collective display device 50. In this manner, during the probability setting change, by displaying different display (different from the normal display) on the collective display device 50 in the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 can not play the game. It can be clearly stated.

  The all-flashing display in FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and the all-on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

  For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (the result of A2401 is "Y"), all-on display or all-on-display on the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 A process of generating output data relating to V.A. may be executed to display the all-on display or the all-flashing display on the batch display device 50 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). Also, for example, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the all-on indication or the all-off indication may be displayed on the collective display unit 50 (LED lamps D1-D18) .

  FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the batch display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the batch display device 50, a performance display regarding the performance (spec) of the gaming machine 10 is displayed. Although the performance indication is printed, it may be displayed by light emission of an LED lamp, a liquid crystal display, or the like. As display of performance, display 85a "1/300 and 1/200" of big hit probability at low probability at setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), display 85b "3 & 2 & 10 & 14" of winning balls, upper limit of round number A display 85c "2, 6, 16" of the value, a display 85d "CRxxxxx" of the model (formal name), and a display 85e (here "no limit") of the presence or absence of the limit regarding the probability variation big hit are displayed.

  In the display 85b of the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls of the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the general winning opening 35, and the special fluctuation winning device 39 is displayed in order. The limit on the probability variation big hit means that the number of continuously occurring probability variation big hits is limited to a predetermined number of limits (A big hit of a predetermined number of limits (number of consecutive shots) can occur in one big hit) Become).

  In addition, since the display 85a of the big hit probability at the low probability time is displayed only for the setting 1 (minimum setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the vacant area around the batch display device 50. In addition, the display 85a of the big hit probability at the low probability time is displayed only for the setting 3 (middle setting) or the display 85 a of the big hit probability at the low probability time is the setting 1 (lowest setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting) Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range (1/300 to 1/200) of the jackpot probability at the low probability time may be displayed.

  Further, among the big hit probabilities at low probability, those which can not be displayed around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the batch display device 50 (big hit probability of setting 2, 4, 5 etc.) are batched outside the game area 32. You may display on the vacant area of another member with the display apparatus 50. FIG. In addition, what was displayed on the package display apparatus 50 on this separate member may be displayed overlappingly. For example, the jackpot probability at the time of the low probability for setting 2, 4, 5 etc. is displayed on a vacant area at the upper right or lower left or upper left of the game board in FIG. 2A or a member (guide rail 31) partitioning the game area 32 May be Alternatively, the jackpot probability at the time of the low probability with respect to the settings 2, 4 and 5 may be displayed in a vacant area (for example, the surface of the general winning opening 35 at the lower left) in the game area. In addition, the display 85e of the presence or absence of the limit regarding the probability variation big hit is displayed as “limited” only when there is a limit, and may not be displayed when there is no limit. As described above, the items displayed as the performance display around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50 can be appropriately changed. For example, the display 85c of the round number upper limit value at the time of big hit is displayed on another area or the display device 41, or some or all items displayed as performance display are displayed on the collective display device 50 as needed, It does not have to be displayed.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at the time of the low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 while changing settings, checking settings, and / or waiting for customers. . The effect control device 300 may store the jackpot probability at the time of low probability in a memory (such as the program ROM 321) in advance. Note that what is displayed on the batch display device 50 may be displayed on the display device 41 in an overlapping manner. Switching of the display of the jackpot probability of each setting may be performed by operating the operation unit such as the effect button 25 or the cross key.

  35 (A) and 35 (B) show predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (here, the probability setting value 6). Shows a configuration in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who is not authorized to change the setting to visually recognize a predetermined display (in particular, the probability setting value) from the oblique direction of the gaming machine 10 while changing the probability setting.

  In FIG. 35A, two depressions 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided in the front of the collective display device 50, and the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special view is respectively provided in the depressions 51a and 51b. The variation display unit 52 is arranged. 35B, an annular wall portion 50a (convex portion) surrounding the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52 is provided on the front of the collective display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special view variation display unit 51 or the second special view variation display unit 52 in the oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which production control device 300 performs with the program for production control is explained.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main process performed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "B ****".

  When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, initialization of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 is executed (B0002, B0003), and an interrupt is permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100.

  Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power on is saved in the area to be initialized (B 0007).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watch dock timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a predetermined period, the WDT times up and the CPU 311 is reset.

  After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process of reading time information from an RTC (real time clock) 338 as a time counting means (B0009).

  In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 in a predetermined cycle (for example, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Alternatively, the RTC reading process may be executed only once at the time of power on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power on to the gaming machine 10) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). And may be performed between B0004). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (clocking means) for measuring time in a timer area in the RAM, and reads information of the time from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to the RTC 338 time. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes using a time timer instead of the RTC 338. In this way, the number of processes for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

  In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (a first predetermined time, a second predetermined time,...), A predetermined effect may be executed, The player can estimate the setting value from the time interval by drawing the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability according to the setting value. For example, the selection rate at long time intervals may be drawn so as to decrease as the set value increases. In addition, the player can estimate the setting value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period for executing the predetermined effect at a probability according to the setting value. For example, the selection rate of the long execution period may be drawn so as to increase as the setting value increases.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process is executed to receive an operation such as change of the brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by a person in charge at the game arcade (game arcade) or a player or the like (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process of executing addition and clearing of effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, an effect or an operation to be added to effect points is executed to execute effect point addition processing, and, at the end of the game, etc., so that effect points can be carried over to the next game, For example, information including information of effect points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. Note that the player can estimate the setting value from the addition value by drawing the value (addition value) to be added to the effect points at a probability according to the setting value. For example, the selection rate of a large added value may be drawn so as to increase as the set value increases.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers (B 0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing (B 0014). The details of the reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41 or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process is executed (B 0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within the frame period 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, preparation for drawing on the display frame buffer is completed, and setting for ending preparation of drawing command is executed (B0016).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is the frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the processing of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y") The screen drawing is instructed (B 0018). Since the frame period in the present embodiment is 1/30 second, frame switching is performed when, for example, periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) formed of an LED or the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (panel effect device 44, frame effect device) such as a motorized product driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, a feature operation effect for driving a motor is set.

  Then, when the process of B0021 described above is finished, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the main process (FIG. 36) described above will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process performed by the effect control device 300.

  In order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the command reception number is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (the result of B 1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the reception command check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the number of received commands is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 receives the command reception counter of the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the receive command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, data is not overwritten even if a new command is received during copying.

  Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command readout index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to be able to store up to 32 received commands. The received command is stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31. Here, the received command is read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether the copy of the command reception number loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N “), Repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always securing a free area in the reception command buffer without performing analysis directly, it is possible to prepare for mass reception of commands.

  Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the contents. Processing is executed (B1108) Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 38. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). It is judged whether the analysis of the command for the number of received command loaded in is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processing from step B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. If the analysis is completed (the result of B 1110 is “Y”), the reception command check process is ended.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 37) described above will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure of received command analysis processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as the MODE portion and the lower byte as the ACTION portion (ACT portion) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is usually transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of command. Ru. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether it is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type) which can be taken by the MODE section indicating the type of command. Then, if the MODE part is in the normal range (the result of B 1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is in the normal range (B 1203). That is, it is determined whether it is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific rendering instruction or the like). Then, if the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B 1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B 1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION part is a possible value of the command of the type specified by the MODE part. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B 1204 is “Y”), command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B 1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the fluctuation system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decoration special symbol, and includes a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process of FIG. 42). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a variable system command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a change system command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of a big hit system command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a jackpot, for example, a fanfare command (set in processing while displaying a special map), a round command (fanfare / interval) Medium command), interval command (set in big winning opening open processing), ending command (big winning opening open processing), and the like. Then, if the MODE section indicates a big hit system command (the result of B 1207 is “Y”), the big hit system command process is executed (B 1208), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a big hit system command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of the symbol system command (B1209). The symbol system commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, if the MODE section indicates a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol system command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of a one-shot system command (B1211). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a single-shot system command (the result of B 1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command processing is executed (B 1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B 1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol system command read ahead (B 1213) . The pre-reading symbol system command includes the above-mentioned pre-reading stop symbol command (A3014 in FIG. 15). Then, if the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “Y”), pre-reading symbol system command processing is executed (B 1214), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (B 1215) ). The prefetch variation system command includes the above-mentioned prefetch variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). Then, if the MODE portion indicates the prefetch change command (the result of B 1215 is “Y”), the prefetch change command process is executed (B 1216), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch change system command (result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 can receive an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode) Because there is a problem, the reception command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), if the ACTION part is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B 1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis process is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section indicates a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, if the MODE unit represents a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization etc. is executed (B1304), and the one-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of a power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “Y”), the power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1307). Then, if the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), then the effect controller 300 displays the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command (A2917, A3207) next to the MODE unit. It is determined whether it is water or not (B1309). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 holding information setting process is executed (B 1310), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), the effect control device 300 next displays the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (A2917, A3203). It is determined whether or not it represents (B1311). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 holding information setting process is executed (B 1312), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the probability information command or not. (B1313). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a probability information command (the result of B 1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting processing is executed (B 1314), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command (the result of B 1313 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command ( B1315). In addition, as an error / illegal command, for example, a fraud occurrence command (set in fraud & prize monitoring process when a fraud occurs), a fraud cancellation command (set in fraud & prize monitoring process when fraud is cancelled), There are a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). Generation of signal from glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) or generation of signal from front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) as status on command (body frame open error, front frame) There is a command that indicates an open error). Also, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

  Then, if the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling an error or a false notification is executed (B 1316), End one-shot command processing.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then executes a command for MODE mode switching for effect mode display (processing for displaying special map) (B1317). It is determined whether or not it represents the setting). Then, if the MODE unit indicates a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit indicates an out-of-balls command or not. (B1319). Then, if the MODE portion indicates the out-of-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-of-ball number reception process is executed (B1320), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the out ball number command (the result of B1319 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 then performs a command of counting the MODE unit (big winning opening count command of A3107 and A3111). It is determined whether it represents (B1321). Then, if the MODE section indicates a command of counting (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the command of counting (the result of B 1321 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the setting value information command (probability setting value information command). (B1323). The setting value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1035 of FIG. 5B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. Then, if the MODE section indicates the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the process at the time of setting value reception is executed (B1324), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the setting value reception process, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and the necessary processing is executed.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a setting change command (B1325). Examples of setting change commands include a setting change instruction command (A1029), a probability setting change command (A1041), a probability setting value change command (A2415), and a probability setting change end command (A2421). Then, if the MODE section indicates a setting change system command (the result of B 1325 is “Y”), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B 1326), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In the setting change related information setting process, the contents of the setting change related command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a setting change instruction command is received, in the setting change related information setting process, a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a setting change system command (the result of B 1325 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation system command (B 1327) . Examples of setting confirmation commands include a command during probability setting value confirmation (A2508) and a command for completion of probability setting value confirmation (A2512). Then, if the MODE section indicates a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is “Y”), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation related information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation related command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command (B1329). The command for symbol stop includes, for example, the symbol stop command of the special view 1 and the symbol stop command of the special view 2. Then, if the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command ( B1330).

  If the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special view (B1331), and the game is performed after all the symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the one-shot system command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "during variation", "big hit" and "small hit" Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the command for symbol stop (the result of B1329 is "N") or when the command of the MODE unit is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device In step 300, the one-shot command processing ends.

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, details of the pre-read symbol system command processing (B1214) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (special view 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decoration special view hold number command is the number of special view 1 hold It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (the result of B 1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) to the special view 1 look ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special view 1 hold count Save (B1602).

  If the latest hold information is not the information of the special view 1 hold (the result of B 1601 is “N”), that is, the decoration special view hold number command received most recently is the decoration special view 2 hold number command In the case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area which corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

  After steps B 1602 and B 1603, the effect control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation system command reception wait flag indicating that the reception of the prefetch fluctuation system command is awaited (B 1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command are set, so the pre-reading variation system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol system command processing ends.

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, details of the prefetch change system command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the prefetch change system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not waiting for the reception of the prefetch change system command (B1701). When the above-described read-ahead change system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of a read-ahead change system command is being awaited. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (the result of B 1701 is “N”), the prefetch change command processing is ended. If waiting for the reception of the prefetch change command (the result of B 1701 is “Y”), the read change flag for the prefetch change command is cleared (B 1702).

  Next, the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest hold information (B1703). The sub-prediction change command MODE portion is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1704). Next, the pre-reading fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the in-sub pre-reading fluctuation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the pre-reading fluctuation system command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the in-sub-prediction change command MODE part and the ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to other than 0. When the converted MODE part and ACT part are both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds The file is saved in the read ahead change command area (the special view look ahead change command area or the special view 2 look ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the pre-read command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is judged whether or not the combination of the converted MODE portion and ACT portion is normal (B1710).

  It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes according to the number of reservations when holding starts the variable display game. When the suspension starts the variable display game, if there is no other suspension, it becomes the longer first half fluctuation, and if the new suspension occurs and the number of reservations is large, it becomes the shorter first half fluctuation. Therefore, the MODE portion of the received prefetch change system command is converted into the in-sub-prediction change command MODE portion so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled the same even if the time value of the first half change is transitioned.

  In addition, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second-half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub-prediction fluctuation command ACT portion does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there is also a kind of reach of the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the second half fluctuation) of the pre-reading fluctuation system command, the number increases and the check becomes difficult . For example, normal reach also includes types such as normal reach-1 stop and normal reach + 1 stop. Therefore, the ACT part indicating the reach of the same system is converted into the same sub inner pre-reading fluctuation command ACT part, thereby reducing the number and reducing the burden of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing.

  Next, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-prediction change command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B 1710 is “N”), it is regarded that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the prefetch change system command processing is ended.

  If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B 1710 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (information of the latest hold) targeted for pre-reading from the pre-reading fluctuation command area (B1711), the pre-reading lottery process regarding pre-reading effect of the latest retention is executed (B1712). As pre-reading effect, there are, for example, continuous pre-notice effect (including chance eye pre-reading effect), pre-reading zone effect, pending change notice and the like. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold previewing notice effect (hold change advance notice) occurs (B1713). If the latest hold previewing advance notice effect occurs (the result of B 1713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected look ahead effect is set (B 1714).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the previewed advance notice effect (pending change advance notice) that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the pre-reading advance notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetch change command processing ends.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest previewing advance notice effect (the result of B 1713 is “N”), or the generated advance notice effect does not start immediately (the result of B 1715 is “N”) ), As it is. End the read ahead variation command processing.

[Design system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the symbol system command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special view type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol system command (the special decoration 1 command or the special decoration 2 command) (B1801). The special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of symbols changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a table is used for each MODE to set the symbol type. In this embodiment, the symbol type is an out symbol, 2R positive variation big hit symbol (2R-A1 etc.) shown in FIG. 27, 2R normal big hit symbol (2R-A2 etc), 6R positive variation big hit symbol (6R-A1 Etc.), 6R normal big hit symbols (6R-A2 etc), 16R positive variation big hit symbols (16R-A1 etc), 16R normal big hit symbols (16R-A2 etc).

[Variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special view type (special view 1 or special view 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is unconfirmed (B1901). If the special drawing type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variation system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and it is determined whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, "mismatch" means contradiction in rendering, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received even though a variation system command of an off-set has been received. If the variation system command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B 1903 is “Y”), variation system command processing ends.

  If the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1904), and the effect during variation is A change effect setting process for setting a certain change effect is executed (B1905). Note that multiple effects exist for the same variable system command. Subsequently, the special game is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) (B1906), and the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous pre-notice effects) is not 0 (B1907).

[Change production setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the fluctuation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the change pattern type is change without reach (change that does not reach reach) (B2001). When the change pattern type is no reach change (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution corresponding to the number of points of effect point, model code, special view type, effect mode, setting value (probability setting value) The group address table is set (B2002), and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the number of reserved special drawing types is acquired (B2003). In the case of no reach fluctuation, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, the table address corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

  If the change pattern type is not reach change (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if the change pattern type is change with reach, the effect control device 300, the number of points of effect points, model code, special view type, effect mode, Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting value (probability set value) (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and variation pattern type Get the address of (B2005).

  After the steps B 2003 and B 2005, the effect control device 300 performs a drawing of a notice that appears during the first half of the movement (before reaching) (B 2006). In addition, the lottery probability of the advance will depend on the set value. Then, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, model code, special drawing type, effect mode, symbol type, setting value (probability setting value) (B2007) The address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the second half appearing during the second half of movement (during reaching) is made (B2009). In addition, the lottery probability of the advance will depend on the set value. Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time, the main reach contents, etc. are known from the fluctuation system command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). Thereafter, stop symbol setting processing is executed to determine the stop symbol of the decoration special view variable display game according to the contents of the change effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattered eyes in the case of the out-of-pattern.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of change effect such as reach effect (B2013), and performs display setting of advance effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special view type is performed, and for example, a display for reducing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special view changing this time is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number is determined which determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the voice of the speaker, and a decoration number which determines the effect mode by light emission of the decoration device is set (B2016). The decoration device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LED etc.) and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing etc.) determined by a decorative number .

  In addition to setting the voice number and the decoration number based on the contents of the effect, it is also possible to set by lottery with a lottery probability according to the setting value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decoration light emitting unit (LED).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B 2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the aforementioned first to third special symbols varying with the display device 41 The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (the fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation is displayed by the lamp display portions 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.

[Big hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the big hit system command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE section of the big hit system command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting fanfare effect is executed (B2102) . The fanfare command includes information of the upper limit value of the number of rounds of the present big hit. Subsequently, the fanfare in progress is set to the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2103), and the big hit system command processing is ended. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE section represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process, and the gaming machine 10 of the current game 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the big hit system command processing ends.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B 2104 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B2107). If the MODE section indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process, and the gaming machine 10 of the current time has 10 games During the interval is set in the gaming state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the big hit system command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent an interval (the result of B 2107 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an ending ( B2110). If the MODE section indicates an ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is an ending command, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect, Ending is set to the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

  In addition, when the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not indicate ending (the result of B 2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the big hit system command processing without executing any processing. Do.

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, winning of the start winning opening) (for example, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 Alternatively, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of displaying on the second special view change display unit 52) generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result of the change display game is a special result. Let The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting regarding the game conditions (or the setting regarding the game) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) can shift to the setting variable state where the setting can be changed when the game machine 10 is powered on, and the power is shut off before the setting variable state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the setting is being changed by the predetermined display on the display unit for the special view variation display game which is easy to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10 It can be suggested that it is impossible (for example, a variable display game). It should be noted that the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power off is maintained even in the setting variable state, and the normal display (off symbol, big hit symbol) etc. at the time of fluctuation stop is displayed on the display for the special view fluctuation display game Then, for example, when the front frame 12 (main frame) is closed before the setting change is completed, there is a possibility that the game may be misidentified as a playable state.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (the game control apparatus 100) can display a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition on the light emitting unit (for example, the LED lamp D1 or D2). . The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting parts of the display device in the setting variable state where the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 can not play a game by performing display different from normal on the display device (the collective display device 50). .

  According to the first embodiment, in the setting changeable state (during setting change), the game control means (game control apparatus 100) displays information indicating that the setting changeable state is displayed (for example, the first special view fluctuation display) You may display on the part 51 or 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52) (FIG. 34B).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 can not play a game by performing display different from normal on the display unit for the variable display game.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) is in the setting change state (during setting change), the display unit (for example, the first special view fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special view fluctuation display unit 52) ) May be turned off (FIG. 34D).

  Therefore, in the setting changeable state (during setting change), the game machine 10 can not play the game by performing display different from normal (display different from the change stop time of the change display game) on the display unit for the change display game. It can be clearly indicated in the front of the gaming machine 10 that there is.

  According to the first embodiment, in the setting changeable state, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (outgoing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) , And may be displayed on the first special view change display unit 51 or the second special view change display unit 52) (FIG. 34C).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by performing predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game, it can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. By displaying the stopping result (outgoing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) from under setting change, regarding the data to be displayed on the display unit for the variable display game, the initial setting change end time It becomes unnecessary to set the value.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. FIG. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Moreover, in the following embodiment, the same code | symbol is used for the structure which fulfill | performs the same function as 1st Embodiment, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted suitably and demonstrated.

  The first embodiment relates to a chance look-ahead presentation effect (a chance look-ahead notice) with a missing symbol. The chance eye that is a specific stop result aspect (specific outstop design aspect) of the decorative special figure variation display game is made lottery or selectable according to the setting value (probability setting value), suggesting or notifying the setting value by the chance eye to enable.

[Stop symbol setting process]
The stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure of stop symbol setting process (B2012) executed by the effect control device 300 in the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44) when executing the special figure fluctuation display game. In the stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special view variable display game is determined.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special view change display game related to the received change system command is a big hit (B2301). When the special figure variation display game is a big hit (the result of B 2301 is “Y”), a big hit stop symbol (“2, 2, 2”, etc.) is drawn according to the symbol type (B 1802) (B 2302).

  The effect control device 300 determines that the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) of the chance look-ahead effect as the continuous notice effects is 0 when the special view change display game is not a big hit (the result of B 2301 is “N”). It is determined whether there is any (B2303). If the number of pre-reading effect (the number of remaining continuous advance notice effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B2308. In addition, the initial value of the number of pre-reading effect times (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) is the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pending target pending, that is, the expected degree of the big hit of the special view fluctuation display game executed by the pending target pending. May be set.

  If the number of pre-read effects (the number of remaining continuous advance notice effects) is not 0 (the result of B 2303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 pre-reads the chance eye stop symbol mode (chance eye mode, missing symbol group) It sets according to the degree of expectation of the big hit of retention (B2304). For the chance eye stop symbol mode, a normal mode in which the set value can not be suggested or notified, a special mode in which the set value can be suggested (setting suggested mode), a definite mode in which the set value can be informed in a definite manner There is a setting notification mode (see FIG. 47).

  For example, when Special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in the special view change display game according to the suspension (start memory) of the prefetch target, the chance eye stop symbol form is set to the normal mode, Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) If a special 3 reach (SP 3 reach) occurs, the special mode can be set to the final mode. As described above, since the expectation level (expected value) of the big hit is in the order of SP1 reach <SP2 reach <SP3 reach, it is possible to set the chance eye stop symbol aspect according to the expected level of the big hit of the pre-reading target. In addition, conversely, when SP3 reach occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game which relates to suspension of the pre-reading object, the chance eye stop design aspect is set to normal mode, when SP2 reach occurs, it is set to special aspect, When SP3 reach occurs, it may be set as a decision mode.

  As described above, by setting the chance eye stop symbol mode corresponding to the type of reach for the pre-read target (system of reach effect), the chance eye stop symbol according to the expected level of the jackpot for the pre-read target Can be set. Therefore, the chance of stopping the big hit of the pre-read object can be notified as pre-reading effect by the chance eye stop symbol mode. In addition, the reach type generated in the special view fluctuation display game according to the suspension of the prefetch target can be known from the prefetch fluctuation pattern command as the prefetch fluctuation system command (B1215) and the content (B2010) of the fluctuation effect.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a setting indication effect (setting-related effect) for indicating or notifying a setting value (B2305). When the chance eye stop symbol mode is the normal mode and the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2305 is "N"), the stop symbol is shifted from the normal mode of the out pattern mode (out pattern group) regardless of the setting value. Is drawn out (B2306), and the stop symbol setting process is ended. If the chance eye stop symbol mode is a special mode or a definite mode, and if the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2305 is "Y"), if it is a special mode, it is a special mode out of a lost design mode (a lost design group) In the lottery probability according to the setting value, the shift stop symbol is drawn, and if it is the decision mode, the decision stop symbol is decided (decided) according to the setting value from the decision symbol form (depart symbol group) of the decision mode (B2307) .

  The effect control device 300 executes a setting indication effect (setting related effect) for suggesting or notifying a setting value when the pre-reading effect number (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not to do (B2308). For example, it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed when a lottery is performed and the game is won. When the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2308 is "N"), a lottery symbol is drawn out irrelevant to the set value (B2309). When the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2308 is "Y"), a shift stop symbol is drawn with a drawing probability according to the set value (B2310). As described above, even when the number of pre-reading effects (the number of remaining continuous notice effects) is 0 and the chance look-ahead effect is not performed (the result of B2303 is "Y"), the indication effect is set independently of the chance eye pre-reading effect. It can be done.

  The processes from step B2308 to B2310 are optional and may not be executed.

[Chance eye stop pattern mode]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a chance eye stop symbol pattern in the chance look-ahead effect. The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a confirmation mode (setting alert mode).

  For example, “2,4,6” (blue), “1,5,9” (green), “3,7,7” (red) may be removed from the normal pattern of the out-of-pattern mode (deteriorated pattern group), for example. There is a stop pattern. For example, “2,4,6” (green), “1,5,9” (red), “3,7,7” (blue) may be removed in the special symbol pattern (a symbol group). There is a stop pattern. "O, 1, 1", "O, 2, 2", "O, 3, 3", "O, 4, 4", "O, 5", regardless of the color, in the removal pattern aspect (deterioration pattern group) of the determination mode , 5 "and" ○, 6, 6 "stop symbols are available. In addition, (circle) shows the arbitrary pattern different from two patterns (Zoro eyes) which the inside and the right of three ornament identification patterns (identification information) in right and left aligned.

  In addition, the out-of-stop stop pattern of the confirmation mode (setting notification mode) has a color (for example, blue, green, gold other than red, red, etc.) or a shape that is not used in the normal mode and the special mode, It may be distinguished to be easy.

  In the normal mode, the selection rate (allocation rate) in the lottery of each off stop symbol is set to the same value regardless of the setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expected degree) of each setting when one lost stop symbol of the normal mode is selected is the same (100/6 ≒ 17%). The probability in FIG. 47 is the degree of expectation of each setting value that can be estimated by the player when a specific out-of-stop symbol is displayed. Therefore, the normal mode is a mode in which the player can not estimate the setting value, that is, a mode in which the setting value can not be suggested or notified. In the example of FIG. 47, the selection rate of the out-of-stop symbol of the normal mode in one lottery is 100/3 (≒ 33.3)% in all cases.

  In the special mode, the selection rate in the lottery of each off stop symbol is set to be different depending on the setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expected degree) of each setting when one lost stop symbol in the special mode is selected is different (may be the same in some settings). Therefore, the special mode is a mode in which the player can estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be suggested.

  In the finalization mode, the selection rate in the lottery of each out-of-stop symbol is set to 100% only for one predetermined setting (setting value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, when one losing stop symbol in the finalization mode is selected, the probability (expected degree) of being a predetermined one setting becomes 100%, and the probability of being another setting (expectedly (expected) Degree is 0%. For this reason, the determination mode is a mode in which the player can recognize the setting value, that is, a mode in which the setting value can be notified in a definite manner.

  In addition, the three decorative identification symbols of the special aspect can suggest a set value by having a specific color. For example, the off stop symbol "2, 4, 6" (blue) of the normal mode can not indicate the set value. However, in the special mode out-of-stop stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (green) of the special mode in which only the color part is the same as the out-stop stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) of the normal mode By having green), it is possible to suggest a set value. In addition, the three decorative identification symbols in the special aspect may indicate setting values by having a specific shape.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of selecting the chance-eye stop symbol mode (chance-eye mode, dropped symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance symbol stop symbol mode is selected by lottery with a selection rate (allocation ratio) different between the case of the big hit and the case of the special figure change display game related to the suspension of the prefetch target. Therefore, as in the case of setting the chance eye stop symbol mode corresponding to the reach type of the pending target prefetch, the example in FIG. 48 also uses the chance eye stop symbol aspect as the pre-reading effect, the big hit of the prefetch target pending The degree of expectation can be informed. In addition, it can be known from the symbol type (B1802) whether the pre-read object is suspended for a big hit or a loss.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (A), the expectation of the jackpot of the pre-reading target may be high in the order of the normal mode <special mode <fixed mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the probability of the jackpot of the pre-reading target being reserved may be higher in the order of the confirmation mode <special mode <normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48 (B), even if the finalization mode or the special mode is selected and the player recognizes that the expectation of the jackpot of the suspension of the preread object is low, the setting (setting value) is finalized according to the finality mode. Therefore, the player is not disappointed.

  In addition, if the selection rates of the normal mode, the special mode, and the confirmation mode in FIG. 48 are made the same as the selection rates of SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach, as described above This is the same as setting the normal mode, the special mode, and the final mode in response to the occurrence of the SP1 reach, the SP2 reach, and the SP3 reach.

  In addition, according to the power on of the gaming machine 10 and the number of big hits from the start of the gaming, the number of big hit consecutive number of big hits from the big hit start to the return to the normal gaming state (the number of consecutive chans), and the operation time of the gaming machine 10 becomes large, A configuration is also possible in which the selectivity of the determination mode is increased. Since the confirmation mode is a reward for the player, this configuration can increase the operation of the gaming machine 10.

  As described above, the chance eye stop symbol form is associated with the expectation of the big hit of the reserve target for pre-reading target, and the chance stop stop symbol of the chance eye stop symbol form (especially the special aspect, the confirmation aspect) is drawn with a probability according to the setting value. it can. As a result, the out-of-stop symbol is drawn at a probability (selectability) according to the result (big hit or lose) of the special view variable display game related to the suspension of the prefetch target and the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
FIG. 49A and FIG. 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the second embodiment.

  (A) of FIG. 49A is a display screen during execution of the decorative special view variable display game. The variation (↓ ↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610, and the variation (↓ ↓) of the ornament reduced symbol (small symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 615. The special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserve number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively show the number “2” indicating the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number The numeral "0" is displayed.

  The hold display unit 630 (start storage display unit) displays a first start display as a first hold display (first start display), and a second hold display (second start display) (2) The second hold display unit 630b displays the display as (starting storage display). Two hold displays 633 are displayed on the first hold display unit 630 a as the first hold display. At the moment, the hold display 633 is not displayed in the second hold display unit 630b. In addition, a holding frame 640 with a rectangular frame is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. A pending change display 633 a is displayed on the pending consumption area 640 that indicates a hold on the special view variable display game being executed (a starting memory that has become the right to execute the special view change display game).

  After that, in (i), the hold (first start memory) is generated by the winning of the start winning opening 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the hold that is generated is a mode from the normal mode by the hold change notice. The color is displayed on hold. Then, the chance look-ahead presentation effect (continuous advance notice effect) is set with the pending with a high degree of expectation of the jackpot as the pending target for the pre-reading (B1712, B1716). In addition, the special figure 1 reserve number in the special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 is increased to the number “3” indicating the reserve number.

  Then, in (c), the decoration special figure variation display game is over, and the first chance look-ahead presentation effect is executed with the display of the stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) of the normal mode. . Here, the whole or a part of the deviation stop symbol may be blinked to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. It should be noted that the pending change display 633a is erased at the end of the decorative special view variable display game. In the normal mode, the player can not estimate the setting (setting value).

  After that, in (D), the next decoration special figure variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display portion 630 a moves to the hold region 640. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is reduced to “2”.

  And in (e), the decoration special figure fluctuation display game ends, the second chance look-ahead presentation effect is out of the special mode (setting suggestion mode) stop design “1,5,9” (red) Executed by display. Here, all or a part of the off stop symbol may be blinked to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. A setting (setting value) is suggested by the disconnection stop symbol of the special mode, and the player can estimate the setting (setting value) (the probability of being setting 4 is high according to FIG. 47).

  After that, in (f), the next decorative feature variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display portion 630 a moves to the hold region 640. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is reduced to “1”.

  Then, in (K) of FIG. 49B, the decoration special view variation display game is ended, and the third chance look-ahead effect is out of the stop mode “1, 6, 6” of the determination mode (setting notification mode). Executed by display. Here, all or a part of the off stop symbol may be blinked to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. The setting (setting value) is informed in a definite manner by the cancellation stop symbol of the determination mode, and the player can recognize the setting (setting value) (confirming that setting 6 is made according to FIG. 47).

  In addition, in the case of the confirmation mode, the speech 635 as a character image may be displayed. The dialogue 635 is selected in accordance with the setting (setting value) determined by the stop pattern of the determination mode. For example, when setting 6 (setting value 6) is finalized with a stop symbol "O, 6, 6" as shown in (f), "Congratulations!" Is displayed, but a stop symbol "O, 1 , 1 ”and setting 1 (setting value 1) is determined,“ sorry ”may be displayed.

  After that, in (v), the next decoration special figure variation display game is being executed due to the suspension of the prefetch target. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 (black) on the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the hold consumption area 640. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650 is reduced to “0”.

  After that, in (f), the decoration special figure variation display game ends, and the suspension display 633a during variation is erased and the big hit stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed. And, in (ko), the round of big hit starts as special game state.

  With regard to the screen transition described above, the special mode of (e) of FIG. 49A may also display words as a character image. The serif may be selected according to the special aspect of the off stop symbol. Moreover, the structure which suggests a setting is also possible by the combination of serif and the special form of the stop stop pattern. For example, in the combination of the off stop symbol “1,5,9” (red) and the serif “Congratulation!”, The probability of being the setting 6 (setting value 6) is increased, and the off stop symbol “1,5,9 (Red) and serif “Sorry”, the probability of being setting 1 (setting value 1) may be increased.

  Further, with regard to the screen transition of FIG. 49 described above, the whole or a part of the off stop symbol may be blinked so as to be noticeable only when the off stop symbol of the determination mode is displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 49, although the chance eye stop symbol aspect in the chance look-ahead effect of three times is made to differ each time, the chance eye stop symbol aspect may be made to be the same every time. And this same aspect may be determined according to the expectation of the big hit of the reserve of pre-reading object.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the game machine 10 changes and displays a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbol) based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, winning of the start winning opening) (decorative game variation display game) ) Is displayed on the display device 41, and the special game state is advantageous for the player when the stop result mode of the variable display game is the special result mode (big hit result mode). Generate The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition. The start storage means (for example, the game control apparatus 100) can store the start storage which becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. The prior determination means (e.g., the game control apparatus 100) executes the variable display game execution information (e.g., the variable display game) related to the start memory before the variable display game based on the start memory stored by the start memory is executed. And the variation pattern etc.) before the variable display game based on the starting memory is executed.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) does not stop the change result game (the decoration special view change display game) when the stop result mode does not become the special result mode (big hit result mode). By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a confirmation mode), it is possible to execute advance notice effects (chance look-ahead appearance, chance look-ahead notice) based on the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means. Furthermore, the effect control means (effect control device 300) uses the specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a final mode) to suggest or notify a setting (setting value). It is feasible.

  Therefore, in the notice effect based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, it is also possible to suggest or notify the setting (setting value), so the player is not only guessing whether or not to be a big hit but also setting (setting value). It can be guessed that it is possible to prevent the notice effect from becoming monotonous. For this reason, the interest of the game is improved. Furthermore, even when the expectation of the big hit is low in the notice effect, the player has more pleasure in guessing the setting (setting value) and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting related effect by the plurality of identification information (decorative special symbol) of the specific stop result aspect having a specific color. . Therefore, the player also pays attention to the color of the identification information (decorative special symbol) of the stop result mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), a plurality of identification information (disappearing stop symbol) of a specific stop result mode (for example, special mode, fixed mode), the specific stop result mode It is selected when the variable display game to be derived is executed (FIG. 43, FIG. 44, FIG. 46). Therefore, since a plurality of identification information (disappeared stop symbols) can be selected when the variable display game is executed, not at the time of prior determination, the burden of processing (control) at the time of prior determination is reduced.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. FIG. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions will be appropriately omitted and described. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[The back of the game machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the game control apparatus 100 (main board) and the like disposed on the back side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a reverse view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

  On the back surface of the game board 30, the game control apparatus 100 (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner via the switch base 738 is disposed, and the game control apparatus 100 via the control base 733 above the switch base 738. The effect control apparatus 300 which controls display apparatus 41 grade | etc., Is arrange | positioned based on the effect control command (effect command) transmitted from. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 is provided which covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper surface of the back surface of the game control device 100. In a state where the gaming board 30 configured in this way is stored in the storage section of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 disposed on the back of the gaming board 30 project rearward of the front frame 12. Do.

  In the upper part of the back surface of the front frame 12, a storage unit 750 for storing gaming balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility and for arranging and flowing down the stored gaming balls is disposed. . A payout unit 790 for dispensing the gaming balls having flowed down from the storage unit 750 onto the upper tray 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12.

  In the lower part of the back of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 for controlling the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the gaming control device 100, and a gaming ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24. A ball emitting device 742 to be launched, a connection terminal 743 connected to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices are disposed.

  In the lower part of the back of the game control apparatus 100, the setting key switch 93 (key switch) and the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button switch) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) capable of changing settings relating to gaming conditions. , A button switch, and a seven-segment probability setting value display device 143 (display, LED lamp) are provided. As described above, the setting key switch 93, the setting value changing switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided in the gaming machine 10, and can not be operated (unable to access) unless the front frame 12 is opened, for example. That is, a general player can not access and operate the setting change device 42 and can not confirm the display of the probability setting value display device 143. Further, since the setting key switch 93, the setting value changing switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided inside the gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the internal members 44a and 44b and the external members 95a described later There is no hiding (overlapping).

  The probability setting value display device 143 may be provided at a position not hidden by the initial operation of the internal role objects 44a and 44b and the external role object 95a, and may be provided exclusively on the front of the game board 30, for example. Further, when the probability setting value is displayed so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30, the indicator (LED lamp) or the like of the collective display device 50 may be used as the probability setting value display device 143. May be used as the probability setting value display device 143. Furthermore, even in the case where the probability setting value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front of the gaming board 30 as described above, it is preferable that only the operator can see without being seen by the player. For example, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be viewed by the operator performing a specific operation on the effect button 25. Further, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible by the player by using a special member (for example, a polarization filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, although the setting change device 42 is made accessible when the front frame 12 is opened, the setting change device 42 is provided on the front surface of the game board 30, the display device 41, etc. and the operator performs a specific operation etc. It may be operable.

  Further, the character ratio display section 68 of the state display device 152 for displaying the character ratio of the character to be described later with reference to FIG. 78 (A) may be used as the probability setting value display device 143 or as the probability setting value display device 143. In the case of using the item ratio display unit 68 of 152, the display unit 900 of the four 7 segment types (8 segments including points) of the item ratio display unit 68 during setting change or setting confirmation. The probability setting value may be displayed on any one of them (for example, the display 900 at the left end or the right end). Note that the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display section 68 except during setting change or setting confirmation. Therefore, the item ratio display unit 68 can be used in combination with the display of the item ratio and the display of the setting value.

  Further, a cover member may be provided to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93. By providing the cover member in this manner, it is possible to prevent an operation of the setting key switch 93 by a person who does not have the setting key or a person who performs fraud, and the security effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, in the case where the cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether the cover member covers the setting key switch 93 or not. The game control apparatus 100 can determine whether the cover member has covered the setting key switch 93 by inputting a detection signal from the detection sensor to the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, for example. . For example, when the front frame 12 is closed but the cover member does not cover the front of the setting key switch 93, the game control apparatus 100 displays an error notification on the display device 41, the speaker 19, the LED, By using a lamp or the like, it is possible to take crime prevention measures and fraud measures.

[Effect control device according to the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

  In the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the effect control device 300 according to the first embodiment is shown in that a movable body control circuit 334a is provided instead of the panel effect movable body control 334. See 4).

  The effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the panel decoration device 46 and a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) A 334a is provided.

  The movable body control circuit 334 a controls driving of the board effect device 44 provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and controls driving of the frame effect device 95 provided in the glass frame 15.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the panel effect device 44 includes internal role members 44a and 44b (inner movable members) that enhance the rendering effect in cooperation with the rendering display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

  FIG. 52A is a front view when the board rendering device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment is operated.

  The internal character 44a of the board effect device 44 is housed in the back of the center case 40 so as not to be visible to the player, and is moved in front of the display device 41 to cover the upper side of the display device 41. . The character "superheat" is drawn on the internal part 44a to notify that the jackpot's expectation is particularly high. Similarly, the internal part 44 b of the board effect device 44 is located in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the lower left side of the display device 41. In addition, the character "♪" is drawn on the internal character 44b to notify that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. Audio may be generated from the speaker along with the movement operation of the internal part 44b.

  In the notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 shown in FIG. 44, the effect control device 300 causes the internal prizes 44a and 44b to be operated with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value, thereby causing the set value to be set. I can suggest it. Then, the player has more pleasure in estimating the setting value, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example, the frame effect device 95 includes an external part 95a (outer movable member) that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

  FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame rendering device 95 of the glass frame 15 (open part) according to the third embodiment operates.

  The external part 95a of the frame rendering device 95 is housed in the inside of the glass frame 15 so as not to be visible by the player, and the frame rendering device 95 becomes a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15 by driving. Stand out. A character 95b is drawn on the external part 95a to notify that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. The frame effect device 95 may be provided not only on the glass frame 15 but also on the front frame 12.

  Note that the effect control device 300 can suggest a set value by causing the external part 95a to operate at a selection rate (probability) according to the set value in the preliminary drawing of steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. . Then, the player has more pleasure in estimating the setting value, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Then, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable body control circuit 334a.

Movable body control processing
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of movable body control processing according to the third embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B3001). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power failure is restored.

  If the effect control device 300 determines that the power is not on (when the result of B 3001 is “N”), it starts the normal control processing according to the content of the effect set in the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44) etc. To do (B3003). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the power is on (the result of B3001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command in progress of probability setting change is received (B3002).

  The command under change probability setting is determined to be received when the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command under change probability setting in single-shot system command processing (Fig. 39) (the result of B1325 is "Y"). Be done. That is, the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (A1024 or A1028 The result is “Y”), and the command under the probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B). By depressing the setting value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 while changing the probability setting, the setting value regarding the game condition is changed. Further, the information of the setting value regarding the changed gaming condition is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143.

  If the effect control device 300 determines that the command in the process of changing the probability setting has been received (the result of B 3002 is “Y”), it determines whether or not the command of ending the setting of the probability is received ( B3004).

  It is judged that the command of termination of probability setting change is received when the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command of termination of probability setting change in the one-shot system command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is "Y"). Be done. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 in FIG. 10 is "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is "Y"). It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A2421).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command under probability setting change has not been received (the result of B3002 is “N”), that is, when the normal power on, the effect frame open error It is determined whether it is occurring (B3006). For example, when a state on command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error / illegal system command (B1315), it can be determined that a body frame opening error is occurring.

  If the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change is received (the result of B3004 is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting change is ended, the main body frame opening error is occurring. It is determined whether or not (B3006). On the other hand, if the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B3004 is “N”), that is, if the probability setting change is in progress, the internal part 44a, Only 44b starts the initial operation control process (B3005).

  In the initial operation control process (B3005) of the internal part 44a, 44b, for example, the motor for moving the internal part 44a of the panel effect device 44 and the motor for moving the internal part 44b are driven to drive the internal part 44a, 44b. Is moved to the front of the display device 41, and then control is performed to move to the initial position (initial operation control). Also, for example, after the initial operation control of the internal part 44a is completed, the initial operation control of the internal part 44b is performed. As described above, the initial operation control of the internal part 44a and the initial operation control of the internal part 44b are sequentially performed. In the case where another internal part different from the internal parts 44a and 44b is further attached, similarly, the initial operation control of each internal part is sequentially performed. The initial operation control of the internal part 44a and the initial operation control of the internal part 44b may be simultaneously performed in parallel.

  If the effect control device 300 determines that a body frame opening error is occurring (the result of B3006 is “Y”), that is, if the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened, the internal role Only 44a and 44b start the initial operation control process (B3005). As described above, when the setting change device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, the effect control device 300 starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal role objects 44a and 44b, and the external role control device 300 It functions as a restricting means that restricts the initial operation of the object 95a so as not to execute it.

  On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error is not occurring (the result of B3006 is "N"), that is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed, The restriction on the initial operation of the accessory 95a is released, and the initial operation control process of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a is started (B3007).

  In the initial operation control process (B3007) of the internal role 44a, 44b and the external role 95a, the internal effects 44a, 44b of the board effect device 44 perform the initial operation control similar to the process of B3005. In the external part 95a of the frame rendering device 95, the motor for moving the external part 95a is driven to operate the external part 95a so as to project from above the glass frame 15 (open part), and then to the initial position Control to operate is performed (initial operation control). As described above, the effect control device 300 functions as a control unit that controls the operation of the internal role objects 44 a and 44 b and the external role object 95 a. When another external part different from the external part 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external part 95a and the initial operation control of the other external part are sequentially performed.

  Further, in the initial operation control process (B3007) of the internal part 44a, 44b and the external part 95a, the time taken for the initial operation control of the internal part 44a, 44b having a large number of movable parts is the external part 95a. It takes longer than the time taken to control the initial operation. Note that the time taken for the initial operation control of the internal roles 44a and 44b is the external role even when there are multiple effect modes of the internal features 44a and 44b and the operation is complicated regardless of the number of movable features. It takes longer than the time taken to control the initial operation of the object 95a. Also, movable between the center case 40 and the glass frame 15 (open portion) (for example, a position intermediate between the internal characters 44a and 44b and the external character 95a), for example, movable toward the center of the gaming machine 10 In the case where an accessory is provided, it is desirable to perform initial operation control on the movable accessory as well as the external accessory 95a. That is, when the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) is opened, the initial operation of the movable accessory is restricted as in the initial operation of the external accessory 95a and is not executed.

  In addition, when the front frame 12 (body frame, main body portion) is opened, the initial operation of the external actor 95a is restricted to prevent execution, but the external actor 95a (first effect unit, first Movable member) restricts only the initial operation of the whole, that is, without performing the initial operation of the entire external part 95a, the movable member (second effect part, the second movable member, and the like of the external part 95a other than the initial operation) It is possible to execute an initial mode such as an operation mode (for example, vibration, swing or the like) of the character 95b) or a light emission mode (for example, light of an eye of the character 95b emits light) of a light emitting member (second effect unit, second movable member) It may be That is, such a second rendering unit can switch the rendering mode to the initial mode in an initial state before executing the predetermined operation (normal operation) of the second rendering unit. By doing this, the external character 95a is the second effect part inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, main body part) even when the initial operation of the first effect part is restricted and is not executed. The initial aspect of can be implemented in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54A and 54B, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process of the comparative example.

  First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

  When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) are turned on, and the initial operation of the internal part 44a is started . In addition, before the power is turned on in advance, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, but since the game control device 100 etc. are not in operation, probability setting until the power is turned on The value changing flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) are not turned on. Also, an initial operation control process of the internal part 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). Note that the initial operation of the external part 95a is restricted and not executed.

  The probability setting value changing flag is set in the main process (FIG. 5B) (A1038) to be turned on, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set in the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11). (A2505), turn on. Commands corresponding to these flags are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B, A2508 in FIG. 11). In addition, when the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state on command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 ( A2207, A2217).

  When the operator finishes changing the probability setting value at time T2 (A2414 and A2415 in FIG. 10), the probability setting value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set and turned on. (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, while the probability setting value changing flag is on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off, in the third embodiment, the probability setting value is changed by completing the change of the probability setting value. It is assumed that the middle flag is turned off and the probability setting value check mode flag is turned on. As in the first embodiment, the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode may be omitted, and the probability setting value changing flag may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

  Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3, the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is cleared and turned off (A 2510 in FIG. 11).

  At time t1 after time T3, the initial operation control process for the internal part 44a is completed, whereby the initial operation control process for the internal part 44b is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53).

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the initial operation of the internal parts 44a and 44b and the external part 95a (initial operation time) is the same, but may be different. For example, the initial operation time of the internal parts 44a and 44b which tends to be a complicated operation mode may be longer than the initial operation time of the external part 95a. Further, the effect control device 300 increases the motor output to increase the speed of the initial operation of the internal members 44a and 44b, thereby making the initial operation time of the internal members 44a and 44b shorter than the initial operation time of the external member 95a. You may

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed at time T4, the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) is turned off, and a state off command (A2204) indicating that the body frame opening error is not generated. Is sent to the effect control device 300 as an error / illegal command. Then, the regulation of the initial operation of the external part 95a is released, and the initial operation control process of the external part 95a is executed (B3007 of FIG. 53). As described above, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the external part 95a is not executed when the front frame 12 is opened.

  At time t2 after time T4, the initial operation control process of the internal part 44b ends. Thus, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the internal part 44a, 44b is started prior to the initial operation control process of the external part 95a, and the initial operation control of the external part 95a End before processing.

  Thereafter, at time t3, when the initial operation control process of the external prize 95a is finished, it is possible to play a game in the gaming machine 10.

  Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. Note that the probability setting value change in progress flag, the probability setting value confirmation mode in progress flag, and the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 of the comparative example are also from time T1 to time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control process of the third embodiment. It is turned on and off.

  Here, the internal product 44a of the comparative example does not execute the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (main body frame) at time T1. Control processing is performed. Therefore, the initial operation control process of the internal part 44a and the external part 95a of the comparative example is started at the same timing (time T4).

  Thereafter, at time t3, when the initial operation control process of the internal part 44a and the external part 95a is finished, the initial operation control process of the internal part 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is a time when it becomes possible to play a game on the gaming machine 10 according to the initial operation control process according to the present embodiment as described above.

  Then, at time t4, the initial operation control process of the internal role item 44b is finished, so that the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example can also play a game. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time when the game becomes possible is later than the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

  Note that although the internal operation products 44a and 44b of the present embodiment are subjected to the initial operation control process by turning on the power at time T1, when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, the external characters 95a are processed. An internal part may be provided whose initial operation control process is performed at the same timing as the above. For example, the operation mode of a movable member (internal part) that affects the game such as the opening / closing door 39c of the special winning opening or the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 may be changed according to the setting value. After the setting value is set, an initial operation control process may be performed according to the operation mode of the setting value. By executing the initial operation control process after setting values are set in this manner, the movable members (the open / close door 39c of the big winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the V winning opening ( It is possible to check whether the movable member (which opens and closes the predetermined area) normally operates in accordance with the operation mode of the set value. The V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning device that may be provided in the special variation winning device 39, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening, notification of the V winning is performed, and the big hit ends A later definite change state (high probability state, specific gaming state, one of predetermined gaming states) is determined. In addition, such an operation control process of the movable member which affects the game is executed not only when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, but also when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3. You may do it. Furthermore, the initial operation control process of the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at time T2 is completed.

  In addition, for the command under probability setting change, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42 is turned on. According to (A1024 or A1028 result is “Y”), it is decided that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), the setting change device 42 regardless of the open state of the front frame 12 The setting key switch 93 may be transmitted by being turned on. Furthermore, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the command under the probability setting change may be transmitted at the timing when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

  Furthermore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on after the power is turned on or when the front frame 12 is opened, the probability setting value changing flag is set (the command of the probability setting change is transmitted. State) The probability setting value may be changed in the setting variable state, or the probability setting value check mode may be set in this setting variable state so that the probability setting value can be confirmed. When the flag is set during the probability setting value confirmation mode, both operations of the internal part 44a, 44b and the external part 95a may be restricted and not executed, or may be returned to the initial position . When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the initial operation control process of the internal prizes 44a and 44b is executed as in the case where the command under the probability setting change in the present embodiment is transmitted. On the other hand, the initial operation of the external part 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
The game machine 10 provided with an openable frame (for example, the glass frame 15 and the front frame 12 (body frame)) in which the game board 30 having the game area 32 according to the third embodiment is disposed is predetermined inside the frame Change the setting regarding the game by the formation of the inner movable member (internal part 44a, 44b) that performs the movement of the above, the outer movable member (the outer part 95a) that executes the predetermined movement outside the frame, and the predetermined condition is met A possible setting change means (setting change device 42), and a control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member. The control means can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member by turning on the power to the game machine 10, and can change the setting while the power is turned on to the game machine 10. When in the state, the initial movement of the outer movable member is not performed, and the initial movement of the inner movable member can be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, when the control means (effect control device 300) is in a state where the setting can be changed when the game machine 10 is powered on (for example, the setting changing means) Is operated (when the setting key switch 93 is turned on) or when the frame is opened, the initial operation of the outer movable member is not performed. Therefore, when operating the setting changing means or opening and closing the frame, the outer movable member can be prevented from coming into contact with the operator or interfering with the frame, and in the gaming machine, the initial operation of the movable member is appropriate Can be

  The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying setting values corresponding to settings relating to a game. The setting display device is provided at a position which is not concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable members (the inner members 44a and 44b) and the outer movable member (the outer members 95a). According to such a gaming machine 10, since it is possible to prevent the setting display device from being hidden by the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member during the probability setting change, it is possible to suppress the interruption of the operator's operation. it can.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) releases the restriction on the initial operation of the outer movable member (the external prize 95a) when the setting changeable state is ended. To be possible. According to such a gaming machine 10, when operating the setting change means or opening and closing the frame, it is possible to prevent the outside movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) takes a longer time than the time required for the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) to move the inner movable member (internal Execute the initial operation of the accessory 44a, 44b). According to such a gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the inner movable member having a long time for the initial operation control is started during the probability setting change, and the initial operation of the outer movable member having the short time for the initial operation control is It is started by closing a frame (front frame 12, main body frame) after completion of probability setting change. Therefore, since the initial operation of the time-consuming inner movable member can be started earlier than when the initial movement of the inner movable member and the outer movable member is started simultaneously after the frame is closed, the game can be started. You can shorten the time to

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, whether the control means (effect control device 300) is operated as the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) even when the game machine 10 is powered on. Or when the frame (front frame 12, main body frame) is opened, the control means (production control device 300) which regulates the initial operation of the outside movable member (external part 95a) is provided. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the outer movable member does not move during probability setting change or when the frame is opened, the outer movable member can be prevented from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame. .

  Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an open portion (glass frame 15) attached to the main body (the front frame 12 and the main frame) so as to be able to open and close. The gaming machine 10 has a first effect unit (external prize 95a, a first movable member) that executes a predetermined operation outside the opening portion, and a setting change unit (setting that can change settings relating to a game by the establishment of a predetermined condition) A change device (42) and control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the operation of the first effect section are provided. The first effect section has a second effect section (character 95 b, second movable member) capable of switching the effect mode in an initial state before executing a predetermined operation (normal operation). The control means can execute the initial mode of the second effect part and the initial operation of the first effect part by turning on the power to the game machine 10, and the power is turned on to the game machine 10 and the setting is changed. When it is in the enabled state, the initial operation of the first rendering unit is not performed, and the initial mode of the second rendering unit is made executable. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second effect portion (the character 95b, the second movable member) having a low possibility of touching the operator or interfering with the frame is replaced with the first effect portion (the external character object 95a, the second effect portion). 1) can be initialized in the initial mode prior to the initial movement of the (movable member).

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting indication effect that can indicate a setting value.

[Set value reception process]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, details of the setting value reception processing (B1324) in the above-described one-shot system command processing (FIG. 39) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a process of setting value reception according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received set value is a normal command (B4001). If the command is not normal (the result of B4001 is “N”), the process for setting value reception ends. If the command is normal (the result of B4001 is "Y"), the setting value is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4002). Then, the effect control device 300 draws the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value in order to perform setting suggestion effect that can indicate the setting value in the predetermined light emitting unit (B4003) . The predetermined light emitting unit is, for example, the projecting effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1), and the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit serves as a setting determination element that causes the player to estimate the setting (setting value). In addition, the predetermined light emission part (rendering device) is not limited to the projecting effect unit 13 but may be a light emitting member capable of emitting light (frame decoration device 18, decoration device 22, panel decoration device 46, big winning opening LED 39d, etc.) You can use the display screen of.

[Lottery table of initial light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selection rate of the initial light emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect drawn by the effect control device 300 when the setting value is received will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining an initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment (initial color determination).

  The initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from, for example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, as shown in FIG. 56, according to the received setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6) Selectivity and selectable types change.

  First, the change in the type of selectable initial color according to the received setting value will be described. When the received setting value is the settings 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from white, blue and green. On the other hand, in the case of setting 4, green can be selected as the initial color in the case of setting 4, and in the case of setting 5, red and green can also be selected. In the case of setting 6, all types are selected It will be possible. Therefore, the player is the setting 4 or more when the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, the setting 5 or more when the color is red, and the setting when the color is rainbow It can be estimated to be 6.

  Next, the change in the selection rate of the initial color selected by lottery in accordance with the received set value will be described.

  When the received setting value is setting 1, the initial color selection rate is 80% for white, 15% for blue, and 5% for yellow. The selection rate of white as the initial color is set to 75% in case of setting 2 and 70% in case of setting 3 so that the selection rate becomes lower as the received set value becomes higher. . In the present embodiment, the selection ratio of white is set to decrease by 5% every time the received set value is increased by one, but a range of certain set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) May be set to be the same. As described above, since the selection rate of white as the initial color is higher as the setting value is lower, the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting part is white. It becomes easy to estimate that 10 is likely to be a low setting platform.

  On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the initial color is 5% in case of setting 1, 10% in case of setting 2 and 15% in case of setting 3 to 6, the received setting value becomes high As the selection rate is set to be higher. In the present embodiment, the yellow selectivity in the settings 3 to 6 is fixed at 15%, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

  Further, the selection rates of the initial colors (green, red) selectable in setting 4 or setting 5 and the initial colors (green, red, rainbow) selectable in setting 6 are respectively set to 5%. Therefore, since the probability that non-white is selected as the initial color is higher as the setting value is higher, the player finds the gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting part is other than white. It becomes easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 is highly likely to be at a high setting.

  In addition, the selectivity of each initial color is not limited to the aspect of FIG. 56, and the value may be changed as appropriate. For example, the rainbow selection rate in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selectivities of the other colors are appropriately adjusted such that the overall selectivity is 100% in accordance with the change in the rainbow selectivity.

[Fanfare production setting process]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process (FIG. 45) will be described as an aspect in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If the command is not normal (the result of B 4101 is “N”), the fanfare effect setting process is ended. If the command is normal (the result of B4101 is "Y"), the number of big hits stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4102).

  Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B4103). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4103 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4104) The fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker are set according to the setting value (B4105). The predetermined number of times may be set three times, six times, nine times and so on, and so on, for each multiple of a specific (for example, 3). Also, the predetermined number of times may be a natural number, and may be set, for example, every odd number (one time, three times ...) or every integer number (two times, four times ...), or a specific number sequence (for example, The Fibonacci sequence can be set such as once, twice, three times, five times, eight times, thirteen times, and so on.

  On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4103 is "N"), the effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and the fanfare sound according to the setting value (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the setting value. Thereafter, when the process of B4105 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

[Promotion lottery table of light emission mode]
Next, referring to FIG. 58, about the selection rate of the light emission mode (promoted lottery color) by the promotion (step-up) lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare production setting process at the big hit start explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining a light emission mode (a promotion lottery color determination) based on a promotion lottery of setting suggestion effects of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 (A) is a table for determining the elevated lottery color when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white, and FIG. 58 (B) is a table for determining the elevated lottery color when the current color is blue. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 58A, for example, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is white is, for example, without promotion (white continuation), blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow It is selected from six types, and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current setting values (settings 1 to 6).

  First, it will be described that the types of selectable elevation colors that can be selected change according to the current setting value. When the current setting value is the settings 1 to 3, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from among none, blue and yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 4, green can also be selected as the elevated lottery color, if setting 5 it is possible to select green and red as well, and if setting 6, all types It becomes selectable. Therefore, the player is the setting 4 or more when the elevation lottery color of the predetermined light emitting portion of the gaming machine 10 is green, the setting 5 or more when the color is red, and the setting when the color is rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

  Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promoted lottery color selected by the lottery changes in accordance with the current setting value.

  When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate without promotion (white continuation) is 80%, the blue selection rate is 15%, and the yellow selection rate is 5% as the promotion lottery color. Then, the selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is set such that the selection rate becomes lower as the current setting value becomes higher, such as 75% in the case of setting 2 and 70% in the case of setting 3 Be done. In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease by 5% every time the current set value increases by one, but a range of certain set values (for example, settings 4 to 6) ) May be set to be the same. As described above, since the selection rate of no promotion (white continuation) as the elevated lottery color is higher as the setting value is lower, the player becomes a state where the elevated lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is not promoted during the game. By confirming that the game is in progress, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be at a low setting.

  On the other hand, the yellow selection rate as the promotion lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 10% in the case of setting 2, 15% in the case of setting 3 to 6, and the current setting value is high. The selectivity is set to be higher as In the present embodiment, the yellow selectivity in the settings 3 to 6 is fixed at 15%, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

  In addition, the selection rates of the elevated lottery colors (green, red) selectable in setting 4 or setting 5 and the elevated lottery colors (green, red, rainbow) selectable in setting 6 are set to 5%, respectively. . Therefore, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability that anything other than no promotion (white continuation) is selected as the promotion lottery color becomes high, so the player changes the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit by promotion during the game. By confirming that the game is in progress, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be a high setting stand. In addition, it can be connected to the motive for the player's continuation game by being able to estimate that there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 in the game is a stand of high setting by the promotion lottery.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is blue is, for example, no promotion (blue continuation), yellow, green, red, rainbow The selection rate and the selectable types change according to the current setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6), as in the case where the current color is white, which is selected from the five types.

  First, it will be described that the types of selectable elevation colors that can be selected change according to the current setting value. When the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected as either non-promotion or yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 3, green can also be selected as the enhanced lottery color, and if setting 4 or setting 5, green and red can also be selected, and setting 6 All types can be selected. Therefore, the player is the setting 3 or more when the elevation lottery color of the predetermined light emitting portion of the gaming machine 10 is green, the setting 4 or more when the color is red, and the setting when the color is rainbow. It can be estimated to be 6.

  Next, it will be described that the selection rate of the promoted lottery color selected by the lottery changes in accordance with the current setting value.

  When the current setting value is setting 1, the selection rate for no promotion (blue continuation) is 95%, and the selection rate for yellow is 5% as the promotion lottery color. Then, the selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is 80% in the case of setting 2 and setting 3, 75% in the case of setting 4, etc., and the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. Is set as In the present embodiment, the selection rate without promotion is set to be the same value or lower every time the current setting value is increased by one. In this way, since the selection rate of no promotion (blue continuation) as the promotion lottery color is higher as the setting value is lower, the player becomes a state where the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting part is not promoted during the game. By confirming that the game is in progress, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is highly likely to be at a low setting.

  On the other hand, the yellow selection rate as the promoted lottery color is 5% in case of setting 1, 20% in case of setting 2, 15% in case of setting 3 or 4 and setting 5 or 6 In the case it is set to 20%. Here, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is higher in the case of setting 2 (20%) which is a low setting than in the case of setting 3 or setting 4 (15%) ing. However, the selectivity for promotion with setting 3 is the sum of the yellow selectivity (15%) and the green selectivity (20%), and is equal to the selectivity with promotion for setting 2 It becomes. Furthermore, compared with the case of setting 2, there is a possibility that the setting 3 is immediately promoted by two steps to be green, and the setting 4 is promoted by three steps and is possibly red. In the case of setting 5, there is a possibility that the promoted lottery color will be immediately promoted to red by three steps, and in the case of setting 6, there is a possibility of being promoted to four steps by rainbow. Therefore, it is easy for the player to estimate that there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 in the game is a high setting by confirming that the elevated lottery color of the predetermined light emitting part has been promoted in multiple stages during the game. Become.

  In addition, in the case of the promotion lottery color (not shown) of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is green or later, as in the case where the current color is blue, only the promotion is promoted and the upper color is promoted It is possible to determine whether to change to the elevated lottery color. According to such an aspect, the game machine 10 in the game is set high by the player confirming that the elevated lottery color of the predetermined light emitting part has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game. It is easy to estimate that it is likely to be on the platform.

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process has been described, a demotion lottery may be performed. By performing the demotion lottery, for example, when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue, it can be changed to white.

  In addition, in the case of performing the demotion lottery, for example, after the promotion to the rainbow, the demotion lottery may not be performed. In this way, by not performing the demotion lottery after reaching the rainbow, the player can continuously obtain a sense of achievement that the setting suggestion effect of the high setting (setting 6) is reached, and the interest of the game is improved. It can be done.

  Furthermore, although a multi-level promotion was possible in the promotion drawing, it may be possible to demote the color to a lower color one by one in the demotion drawing. As described above, in the relegation lottery, by avoiding the multi-stage demotion mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the setting suggestion effect falling rapidly to the low setting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the selection rate of each promoted lottery color is not limited to the aspect of FIG. 58 but can be appropriately changed in value similarly to the selection rate of the initial color described with reference to FIG. For example, the rainbow selection rate in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Further, as the current color becomes the upper color, the selection rate of the higher color may be higher. Specifically, for example, in the case of setting 6, the current color is set to 10% when the current color is green, and to 35% when the current color is red. Depending on the hierarchy of the upper color selection rate can be increased.

[Ending effect setting process]
The mode in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit system command processing (FIG. 45) described above changes is not limited to the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), and the ending effect setting as shown in FIG. It may be generated in the process (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ending effect setting process according to the modification of the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). If the command is not normal (the result of B 4201 is “N”), the ending effect setting process is ended. If the command is a normal command (the result of B4201 is "Y"), the number of big hits stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4202).

  Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B4203). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4203 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4204) The ending display on the display device 41 and the ending sound from the speaker are set according to the setting value (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the setting value. The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, and may be set for each specific multiple, each odd number, or each integer number, or may be set to be a specific number sequence.

  On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4203 is "N"), the effect control device 300 sets the ending display and the ending sound according to the setting value (B4205). Thereafter, when the process of B4205 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting process.

  The selection rate of the light emission mode (elevated lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending effect setting process at the start of the big hit is the fanfare effect setting process described in FIG. It may be the same as the lottery (B4104).

[Process when receiving out ball number]
In addition, the light emission mode of the setting indication effect may be changed at the time of reception of the out-of-sphere number. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing a procedure of out-of-sphere number reception processing (B1320 in FIG. 39) according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received out-sphere number command is a normal command (B4301). If the command is not normal (the result of B 4301 is “N”), the out ball number reception process is ended. If the command is normal (the result of B4301 is "Y"), the out-of-ball number is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4302). The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 8).

  Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether the number of out-of-balls reaches a predetermined number (B4303). When the number of out-of-spheres is a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4304 ). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (every 1000 spheres, ie, 1000, 2000, 3000...). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4304) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of out-of-field balls is not a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the out-of-ball number reception process.

[RTC read processing]
Furthermore, at the time of RTC reading processing (B 0009) in the main processing (FIG. 36), the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the RTC read process (B0009) according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received signal from the RTC 338 is a normal signal (B4401). If the signal is not normal (the result of B4401 is "N"), the RTC reading process is ended. If the signal is a normal signal (the result of B4401 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). The information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from the RTC 338 that forms a clock.

  Then, the effect control device 300 calculates an elapsed time from the game start (or power on) (B4403), and determines whether the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). When the elapsed time has reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4405) . The predetermined time can be set, for example, every two hours (for example, 11 o'clock, 13 o'clock, 15 o'clock, etc.). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4405) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time (the result of B 4404 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting process]
Further, at the time of count information setting processing (B1322) in the single-shot system command processing (FIG. 39), the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the count information setting process according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received command of the count (large winning opening count command) is a normal command (B4501). If the command is not normal (the result of B4501 is "N"), the count information setting process is ended. If the command is a normal command (the result of B4501 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the jackpot operation is in progress (B4502). When the jackpot is not in operation (the result of B4502 is “N”), the count information setting process is ended.

  When the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). The number of winning balls in the big winning opening is added to the number of winning balls (B4504), and the setting for displaying the number of winning balls and displaying the count (displaying the number of counts) is updated (B4505). Here, the number of counts and the number of balls obtained are the number of counts and number of balls obtained in a row from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal gaming state, but the number of counts in one big hit and It may be the number of winning balls, or may be the total count number from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 and the number of winning balls.

  Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of balls obtained has reached a predetermined number (B4506). When the number of balls obtained is a predetermined number (the result of B 4506 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 lottery the light emission mode (color) of the special winning opening LED 39 d in accordance with the received setting value (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (every 5,000 balls, that is, 5,000, 10,000, 15,000, etc.). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. Next, the acquired balls-out number display, the count display, and the like are displayed and set according to the set values as described later with reference to FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64 (B4508). Here, the display modes such as the number-of-obtained-balls-in-one display and the count display are drawn at a selection rate according to the set value.

  On the other hand, when the number of balls obtained is not a predetermined number (the result of B 4506 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

  In the count information setting process, when the big hit is in operation (the result of B4502 is “Y”), the winning ball number of the big winning opening is added to the winning ball number (B4504) Elevated lottery mode (color) was selected for lottery (B4507), but by adding the winnings to start winning hole 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the number of balls obtained during the normal gaming state, the number of starting balls is added to the number of balls obtained. The light emitting unit (LED) provided in the mouth 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may emit light in accordance with the setting value.

  Here, the setting of updating the display of the number-of-obtained-out-of-balls display and the count display according to the setting value will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B. FIG. 63A is a view showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 at the time of big hit in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a view showing another example. In the example of FIG. 63A and FIG. 63B, when the number of obtained balls has become a predetermined number, the display mode of the display of the number of obtained balls, the count display, and the display of other information is drawn at a selection rate according to the setting value. Set the display.

  The display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round when the number of obtained balls has not reached the predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B 4506 is “N”) is as shown in FIG. 63A, for example.

  In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 for displaying the current number of big hit rounds is displayed by, for example, “1” R and numeral notation (Arabic numerals (“1, 2, 3...”)). Further, in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen, a right hitting instruction notification 691 which is a notification instructing to hit the right is displayed. Furthermore, at the left end of the display screen, the big hit stop symbol "7, 7, 7" (stop result, stop symbol) of the special variation display game immediately before the big hit result aspect (big hit stop symbol, special result aspect) is It is displayed by "7" and numeral notation (Arabic numeral). Then, at the lower right corner of the display screen, an effect point display 678 for displaying effect points is displayed, for example, as "0030" pt and numerical notation (Arabic numeral). In the right middle corner of the display screen, the acquired popped ball number display 681 and the count display 682 are displayed, for example, as "4910" and "150" and numeral notation (Arabic numeral).

  Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round when the number of acquired balls is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B 4506 is “Y”) is as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

  Here, for example, as the setting value is lower, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the current jackpot round number display 676 ("壱" R) and the presentation point display 678 ("30" pt) It becomes easy to be displayed in kanji ("壱, 弐, 参 ・ ・ ・"). In addition, the currently acquired prize number display 681 ("five thousand") and count indication 682 ("one hundred fifty-seven") are displayed in kanji notation (kanji ("壱, 壱, 弐 ・ ・ ・")) It will be easier.

  FIG. 64 is for determining the display mode of the display of the number of acquired balls display 681 as the setting suggestion effect, the count display 682 and other information (big hit round display 676, effect point display, etc.) in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a table of. FIG. 64 (A) is a table showing that the selection rate (allocation ratio) of Arabic numerals (numeric notation) or kanji (kanji notation) changes according to the setting value, and FIG. 64 (B) shows the setting value. It is a table which shows that the selectivity of a color changes according to.

  For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection rate of numerical notation is 45%, and the selection rate of kanji notation is 55%. On the other hand, in case of setting 6, the selection rate of numerical notation is as high as 75%, and the selection rate of kanji notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is numeric notation or kanji notation when the setting suggestion effect is performed.

  In the case of numerical notation, as shown in FIG. 63A, the display screen is the same as in the case where the number of acquired balls is not a predetermined number. Also, when the number of winning balls is a predetermined number, the big hit stop symbol 677 may be displayed in kanji notation ("seven (or lacquer)") according to the set value, "setting suggestion effect occurrence!", Etc. Characters or the like may be displayed on the display screen to notify the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. Furthermore, the selection rate may be set to be displayed in another notation format (for example, Roman numerals (“I, II, III...”)) In addition to numeric notation and kanji notation.

  In addition, the determination of the display mode of the setting suggestion effect changes the selection rate of numeric notation, kanji notation, etc. and changes the selection rate of the color displayed according to the setting value as shown in FIG. 64 (B). You may

  For example, in the case of setting 1, the selectivity for black is 35%, and the selectivity for blue is 45%. On the other hand, in case of setting 6, the black selectivity is as high as 70% and the blue selectivity is as low as 20%. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting value by confirming what color the display on the display screen shows when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

  When the setting value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the red selectivity is 20%, and when an even number (2, 4, 6), the red selectivity is 10%. Therefore, the player can estimate that the setting value is an odd number or an even number by checking whether the display on the display screen is red when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

  As described above, the player can estimate the setting value from the display screen by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round according to the setting value and performing the setting suggestion effect. Note that the display mode of the display screen is not limited to numerical notation or the like and colors, and may be performed by changing the size, font, and the like of characters. In addition, a predetermined symbol or figure or the like corresponding to the setting value may be displayed on the display screen by the setting suggestion effect.

[Modification of light emission mode change (promotion etc.)]
The light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emission mode (initial color) during execution of the special view variation display game. Regarding the relationship of the expectation of the big hit in this case, when it is not the big hit (when the expectation is low), the light emission aspect (initial color) corresponding to the setting value and the aspect not changing as it is, and the light emission corresponding to the setting value The mode (initial color) may be changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation of the effect. In addition, after the end of the special view variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation degree to the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the setting value. Furthermore, when it is not a big hit (when the degree of expectation is low), it is easy to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting part with a low setting value so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming will. In a mode in which the selection ratio of settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table such as 58 etc. is reversed (for example, a mode in which the selection ratio between settings 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 6 is reversed), the player May be interested.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, the light emission mode corresponding to the set value is not changed as it is, or from the light emission mode corresponding to the set value to the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation of the effect And may be changed. In addition, after the end of the special view variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emission mode corresponding to the expectation degree to the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the setting value. As described above, in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, during the special figure variation display game), the setting value is set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit (special result). It is possible to switch between the corresponding light emission mode (setting suggestion effect) and the light emission mode (expected degree notification effect for notifying the expectation degree) corresponding to the expectation degree of the effect.

  Therefore, when the expectation of the big hit is high, if the expectation of the big hit is notified by changing from the setting suggestion effect to the expectation information effect, the game can be enjoyed and the interest of the game can be improved. Conversely, when the degree of expectation is low, if the expectation degree notification effect is changed to the setting indication effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation and the possibility of improving the interest of the game and the operation of the gaming machine There is.

  Furthermore, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), it is difficult to promote the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit with a high setting value so as to make it easy to focus attention on effects on the display device 41. 58 is a mode in which the selection ratio of settings 1 to 6 in the elevation lottery table in FIG. 58 is reversed (for example, a mode in which the selection ratio between settings 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 6 is reversed) The light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the high setting may be made uninteresting to the player. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to promote the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit with the high setting value. As a result, the player can be expected to have a sense of expectation in a well-balanced manner without excessively expecting a sense of expectation by the highly expected effect on the display device 41 and the light emission mode having a low degree of expectation of the predetermined light emitting portion. Since the effect on the display device 41 and the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting portion do not correspond to each other, the effect is surprising and the interest can be improved.

  Also, in other cases (when the player gazes at the display device 41 at the moment of a notice of a drop or a big hit, etc.), the predetermined light emitting unit is temporarily switched to the light emission mode based on the effect and ceases It may return to the light emission mode of the rate based on a setting value by becoming a state (condition). Furthermore, even when the effect to be watched by the display device 41 is performed, the light emission mode may be set to a ratio based on the setting value regardless of the effect. In addition, once the light emission mode (color) has a low degree of expectation, it may be changed to the light emission mode based on the effect.

[Hole / player setting mode processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the hall / player setting mode process (B0011) in the main process (FIG. 36) described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hall / player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment executed by the effect control device 300.

  A hall setting mode in which a person in charge of a hall (gaming shop) can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated by the hall / player setting mode processing. It can be done.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hole setting mode is in progress (B4601). When the flag in the hole setting mode described later is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When the hall setting mode is in progress (the result of B4601 is "Y"), the processing of B4606-B4616 is performed to display the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall (gaming shop) Based on the operation, make various settings and various adjustments.

  When the hall setting mode is not in progress (the result of B4601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B4602). When the player setting mode in progress flag described below is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When the player setting mode is in progress (the result of B4602 is "Y"), the processing of B4620-B2425 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

  When the player setting mode is not in progress (the result of B4602 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4603). For example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a guest, it can be determined that the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied. Here, “waiting for a customer” means, for example, a state in which a video for waiting for a customer (a demonstration for waiting for a customer) is displayed on the display device 41. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is "N"), the processing of B4617 is executed.

  When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B 4603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of a hole setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode. The start setting is made (B4604). Then, a flag is set during the hole setting mode (B4605).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall, etc. Hall volume adjustment processing (B4606), the frame decoration device 18 and the board Hall LED adjustment process (B4607) to adjust the brightness (brightness) and light emission color of the LED of the decoration device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B4608) to adjust the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display etc.) of the display device 41 Power saving setting processing (B4609) for setting the power is executed. Next, the effect control device 300 executes logo color setting processing for setting the light emission color and the like of the logo combination (B4610).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B4611). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  Then, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting at the time of factory shipment has been confirmed (B4612). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting at the time of shipment from the factory is confirmed. If it is not determined by the factory default settings (the result of B4612 is "N"), the process proceeds to B4614. When it is decided by the factory default setting (the result of B4612 is "Y"), the factory default setting processing is performed to perform various settings and various adjustments in the factory default settings (B4613). The factory default settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, hole setting data (or hole adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined in B4606-B4610 and B4613 are written in the backup memory (for example, FeRAM 323) (B4614).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting to end screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode (B4615). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B4616).

  If the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4617). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied, for example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a guest. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4617 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B 4617 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B4618). Then, a flag is set during the player setting mode (B4619).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the player volume adjustment process (B4620), the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration A player LED adjustment process (B4621) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) effects based on the player's operation of the effect button 25 or the like (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B4623). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B 4623 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode processing is ended. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B 4623 is “Y”), screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B 4624). Then, the flag during the player setting mode is cleared (B4625). In addition, since player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as volume and brightness determined in B4620-B4622 may be erased, it is not written in the backup memory.

[Display screen example of hall setting mode]
FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when in the hole setting mode in the fourth embodiment.

  When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B 4603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the hole setting mode (B 4604), and as shown in FIG. 66A, the volume is displayed on the display screen. A setting window 711, a light emission color setting window 712, and a brightness setting window 713 are displayed. The volume setting window 711 is a display used for the hall volume adjustment processing (B4606), and the luminance setting window 713 is a display used for the hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) and the liquid crystal luminance adjustment processing (B4608). The light emission color setting window 712 is a display used for the hall LED adjustment processing (B4607), and as described above, the hall light emission color selected in the hall setting for the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table in the predetermined light emitting unit. Is a display for switching to As described above, the operations of the volume setting window 711, the light emission color setting window 712, and the brightness setting window 713 are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 (including the operation of the touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall. .

  By selecting one of the colors as the hole light emission color in the light emission color setting window 712, the hole light emission color can be preferentially displayed on a predetermined light emitting unit. Therefore, for example, by setting the hole emission color to red or rainbow (specific light emission color) that suggests high setting, it seems that high setting stands are abundantly arranged in an event etc. it can. As described above, the light emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment process can not be set by the player as the setting regarding the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit, and can be set only by the person in charge of the hall or the like as the second setting means. Function. In addition, during the hole setting mode, the display related to the game such as the decoration special symbol (identification information), the hold display unit 630, the hold display 633, the hold digestion area 640, and the special view fluctuation hold display 643 may be hidden. . Since the hall setting mode is not performed during the game, by excluding the unnecessary ones, it is possible to make the display related to the hall setting mode easy to view and reduce the processing load. When the display related to the game is not displayed, only the ornament reduced symbol (small symbol) 616 may be displayed.

  In addition, although the setting suggestion effect was made to display the hall light emission color prior to the one performed according to the lottery table, it is made to be displayed preferentially only while waiting for customers, and the actual game is being played. Can give priority to setting suggestion effects performed according to the lottery table over the hall light emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 in the game in more detail by actually playing the game.

[Display screen example of player setting mode]
FIG. 66B is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the display device 41 when in the player setting mode in the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the player setting mode (B4618) as shown in FIG. 66B, as the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is “Y”). The light emission setting window 714 is displayed together with the volume setting window 711 and the luminance setting window 713. The operations of the volume setting window 711, the brightness setting window 713, and the light emission / non-existence setting window 714 are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B4621). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 is a display used for the player volume adjustment processing (B4620), and the brightness setting window 713 and the light emission presence / absence setting window 714 are displays used for the player LED adjustment processing (B4621). is there.

  It is possible to select whether or not to emit light of a predetermined light emitting part by the light emission presence / absence setting window 714. For example, when the player selects no light emission, the light emission related to the setting suggestion effect of the predetermined light emitting part is not performed. it can. As described above, the light emission / non-existence setting window 714 and the player LED adjustment process function as a first setting unit capable of setting the setting regarding the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit by the player. In addition, since the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIG. 55 to FIG. 62) during the game, unlike the hall setting mode, in the player setting mode The light emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

  In the player setting mode, it is possible to select only the presence or absence of light emission of a predetermined light emitting portion, but the effect mode of the rendering device including the light emission aspect (color) of the predetermined light emitting portion etc. Whether it can be displayed in the range may be settable, or the effect mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit of the effect device may be settable by the light emission color setting window 712 as in the hole setting mode. The effect mode of the effect device is an effect mode performed by control (FIG. 44, FIG. 55 to FIG. 62) depending on the setting value of the effect control device 300, and for example, the light emission mode of the illumination member, the internal character 44a, 44b or The operation mode of the external part 95a, the effect mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like. In addition, in a player setting mode or the like, in which range the effect mode of the effect device is set by the player so as to be able to be displayed or whether the setting suggestion effect depending on the setting value is performed or not. It may be possible to confirm.

  Further, the effect control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when the fraud due to the magnet fraud monitoring process (A 1315) or the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A 1316) is detected. The promoted lottery color or the like in may be reset and displayed in a default color (for example, white).

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Moreover, at the time of customer waiting demo setting processing (B1308) in single-shot system command processing (FIG. 39), it is not the light emission mode of setting suggestion effect but the hole setting mode (light emission color setting window 712 and hole LED adjustment processing) The predetermined light emitting part is made to emit light in a hole emission color. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a procedure of customer waiting demo setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received set value is a normal command (B4701). If the command is not normal (the result of B4701 is "N"), the customer waiting demo setting process is ended. When the command is normal (the result of B4701 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit to the light emission mode (hole light emission color) of the hole setting set in the hole setting mode. Is set (B4702). Then, the customer waiting demo start setting is performed (B4703), and the customer waiting demo setting process is ended.

  Thus, while waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting demo), not the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect but the light emission mode (hole light emission color) set in the hole setting mode is preferentially used. Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hole light emission color) to a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it seems that a high setting table is abundantly arranged in an event etc. it can. In addition, while waiting for a customer, the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the predetermined light emitting portion, and the player plays a game and tries to check the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect. The operation of 10 may be improved.

  When the light emission mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emission mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used while waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting demo) Configuration is also possible.

  In the above fourth embodiment, an example in which the color is controlled depending on the setting value is mainly shown as the light emission mode of the rendering device (predetermined light emitting unit), but the luminance (the light emission mode of the rendering device) (Brightness), turning on / off or blinking is included, and in the case of blinking, a blinking cycle or the like is also included. In addition, if the rendering device is a movable body, the operation mode of the rendering device may be controlled depending on the set value, as in the light emission mode.

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a rendering device (for example, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined rendering, and a rendering control unit (a rendering control device 300) for controlling the rendering device. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (a setting change device 42 (a setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch 102)) capable of changing a setting value corresponding to a setting relating to a game. The effect control means can execute the setting suggestion effect which can suggest the setting value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the setting value.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes possible for the player to estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the state of the gaming machine 10 before or during playing a game, and the suggestion of the setting value is appropriately made. Since the game can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the gaming machine 10 in this manner, a setting suggestion tag (for example, setting 4 is suggested to imply setting values in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 in hall sales) There is no need to install a shark bill, a shrimp bill that suggests setting 5, a bill that suggests setting 6, and it is possible to secure a large space around the gaming machine 10 and improve appearance, as well as the person in charge of the hall The burden can be reduced.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300) of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a first setting means (light emission presence / absence setting window 714, player LED adjustment) capable of setting the setting regarding the effect mode of the effect device by the player. Processing) and second setting means (emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment processing) which can not be set by the player with respect to settings relating to the presentation mode of the presentation device. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting indication effect by the setting value or the second setting means. According to such a gaming machine 10, a person in charge of the hall, etc., is an effect mode (eg red The appearance of the gaming machine 10 can be made as desired by setting the hall light emission color such as a rainbow or the like, and the high setting stand can be seen to be abundantly arranged in an event etc. Can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to set the effect mode to suit the player's preference also for the player, the interest can be improved. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect mode that takes into account the needs for both settings on the hall side and the player side.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment performs the setting suggestion effect and the expectation according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special view variation display game) becomes a special result in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed. It is possible to switch between the expectation degree notification effect of notifying the degree. Therefore, when the expectation to be a special result is high, if the setting suggestion effect is changed to the expectation degree notification effect and the anticipation degree to be a special result is notified, the game can be enjoyed and the interest of the game can be improved. Conversely, when the degree of expectation is low, if the expectation degree notification effect is changed to the setting indication effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation and the possibility of improving the interest of the game and the operation of the gaming machine There is.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

[Example of screen transition when start memory of pending digest area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order according to the fifth embodiment, and the screen of the entire game when the special display changing in reserve display 643 of the reserve digest area 640 changes in reserve. It is an example of a transition. In addition, the drawing of the holding change (the holding change during digestion) of the special figure changing hold display 643 may be performed, for example, in the notice drawing (B2006 or B2009) of the change effect setting process (FIG. 44).

  (A) of FIG. 68 is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

  A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, and middle area 610C) are provided at the center of the display screen of the display device 41. The first pattern A for decoration is displayed on the left area 610A and the right area 610B. The first symbol pattern B is displayed in the middle area 610C, and the first pattern symbol C is displayed in an enlarged manner in the middle area 610C, and stopped and displayed with the symbols "2, 4, 5".

  In the lower central part of the display screen, a reserve digest area 640 (a specific display unit, a floating reserve display area) and a reserve display unit 630 are displayed as a start storage display area. The reserve consumption area 640 and the reserve display unit 630 are displayed in preference to the front (upper layer) over the variable display of the variable display area 610. The setting of such preferential display may be executed, for example, in the effect display editing process (B 0015)

  In the reserve consumption area 640, a special view in-process suspension display 643 (start memory display, special view in-process reserve display) corresponding to a running (digesting) special-figure variation display game is displayed. In addition, in the reserve digest area 640, the start storage display background 640A as a base for the special view reserve display 643 is displayed in a low image quality state on the back surface (layer under the special view reserve display 643). . In FIGS. 68 to 69B, rough hatching of the start storage display background 640A indicates that the start storage display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

  Here, the low image quality state (the first display mode) is a state in which the improvement of the power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load are prioritized over the improvement of the visibility to the player. If the number can be reduced (for example, displayed with less than 921,600 pixels), brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. can be suppressed (for example, less than 50 in 100 steps, adjustment from -100 to +100) Displayed at less than ± 0), low resolution (eg, display at resolution less than 720p (1280 × 720)), low frame rate per second (fps) (eg, less than 30 fps) Or a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, the image of the original high-quality start storage display background 640A is subjected to the low image quality processing in the gaming machine 10 by the processing of the VDP 312 or the like, thereby replacing the high image quality with the display screen of the display device 41. A low quality start memory display background 640A can be displayed. Also, for example, both the low quality image and the high quality (or normal quality) image of the starting storage display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low quality image and the high quality image are replaced according to the situation. By using it, the starting memory display background 640A is displayed with low image quality (or high image quality).

  At the top of the start memory display background 640A, a background object 640B that changes in conjunction with the start memory display background 640A is disposed. The background object 640B is displayed, for example, in two display modes in the form of two leaves arranged at the left and right ends as shown in FIG. The background object 640B is also displayed in a low quality state, similar to the start storage display background 640A. Also, the background object 640B is displayed in the same priority (layer in the same layer) as the start memory display background 640A, that is, in an integral manner. The start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B may be displayed and set, for example, in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44). Also, the background object 640B may be displayed preferentially to the front surface (upper layer) of the start storage display background 640A. In addition, conversely, the start memory display background 640A may be displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

  Up to four hold displays 633 (start memory display, special view hold display) corresponding to undivided start memory are displayed in the hold display unit 630. In (a) of FIG. 68, the hold display 633 is a hold display unit. Three are displayed at 630. The hold display 633 is arranged to overlap a part of the start memory display background 640A, and is displayed in front of the start memory display background 640A. As described above, the effect control device 300 functions as a start storage display control unit that controls the display of the hold display 633 on the hold display unit 630 and the display of the special view changing hold display 643 on the hold consumption area 640. The effect control device 300 executes the display setting of the hold display 633 and the special view fluctuation hold display 643 in step B2015 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44) at the hold shift, for example, and when hold is generated, a one-shot system command The processing may be executed in the special view 1 suspension information setting process (B1310) or the special view 2 suspension information setting process (B1312).

  (I) of FIG. 68 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. In the plurality of variable display areas 610 of the display screen, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal fluctuation mode. In the following figures, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the normal fluctuation mode, the decorative first symbols A to C being variably displayed are indicated by “↓”.

  (G) of FIG. 68 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the on-hold change is made due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, on-hold change or pre-reading advance notice) while the special view variable display game is being executed. Here, while the special view fluctuation pending display 643 is on hold change, the on-hold display 633 may be on hold change as the advance notice effect. In the case of the reserve change during digestion, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 ()), the special display during change reserve display 643 suggests that the change from the normal round display mode to the high expectation by changing the reserve. It becomes a star-shaped display mode.

  Further, the display of the start storage display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state simultaneously with the hold change. In FIG. 68 to FIG. 69B, fine hatching of the start storage display background 640A indicates that the start storage display background 640A is displayed in a high quality state. Similar to the start storage display background 640A, the background object 640B is also displayed in a high quality state (second display mode). The background object 640B changes from a normal bilobal display mode to a flower-like display mode that indicates that the degree of expectation is high. It should be noted that changes in the image quality and display mode of the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are executed at the same timing as the hold change (hold change during digestion) of the special view fluctuation hold display 643 drawn as a notice. For example, display setting may be performed in step B2013 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 44).

  Here, the high-quality state (second display mode) is a state in which the improvement of the visibility to the player is prioritized over the improvement of the power saving performance and the reduction of the graphic processing load. When the number becomes high (for example, displayed with 921,600 pixels or more), the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. become strong (for example, 50 or more in 100 steps, or when adjustable from -100 to +100) Displayed at ± 0 or higher), high resolution (for example, display at 720p (1280 × 720) or higher), high frame rate per second (for example, 30 fps or higher) Or, an uncompressed image or an image with a small compression rate is displayed.

  In (e) of FIG. 68, the display of the display device 41 in the case where the stop result (stop symbol) of the variable display area 610 becomes the disappointing result mode (disengagement stop symbol) when the special view variation display game under execution ends. It is a screen. In the decorative first design A to C of the variable display area 610, “3, 7, 2” is stopped and displayed as a disengaging stop design. In addition, while the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and becomes non-display, the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state and displayed. The background object 640B returns from the flower-like display mode to the bi-leaf-like display mode. The display settings of the start memory display background 640A and background object 640B at the end of the special view variation display game are based on, for example, symbol type (missing symbol or big hit symbol) as part of stop setting (B1331) of single-shot command processing. May run. Thereafter, the oldest starting memory of the hold indication 633 is moved to the special view fluctuation hold indication 643 and the next special view change display game is started. The timing at which the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from the high image quality state to the low image quality state is not limited to when the special display changing hold display 643 is digested and becomes non-displayed, but a predetermined effect Or when the first decorative symbols A to C are stopped and displayed, or when the next special figure variation display game is started.

  In (o) of FIG. 68, the display when the stop result (stop symbol) of the variable display area 610 becomes the big hit result aspect (big hit stop symbol, special result aspect) when the special figure change display game under execution ends. 7 is a display screen of the device 41. In the decorative first symbol A to C of the variable display area 610, "3, 3, 3" is stopped and displayed as a big hit stop symbol, and the character "big hit !!" is displayed below the variable display area 610 . Also, while the special view fluctuation hold display 643 is digested and hidden, the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B maintain the high image quality state. The flower-like display mode of the background object 640B is also maintained as it is. Thereafter, the game of the big hit round is started, and the big hit round effect is executed.

  Note that switching from the low image quality to the high image quality of the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B is limited to the case where the special display changing pending display 643 is changed to a star-like display mode (see FIG. 68). In the previous stage, that is, when starting the special figure variation display game (immediately after (A) in FIG. 68) or in the stage immediately before the occurrence of the in-digestion reserve change ((I) in FIG. You may switch. Further, when the hold change is made in stages or in continuous rendering (at the time of continuous notice effect or at the time of pseudo continuous effect), the image quality of the start memory display background 640A may be switched in stages. Also, for example, when the special display during suspension display 643 or the suspension display 633 is displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the start memory display background 640A is switched to a darker color such as black, and the special image is in transition. It may be easy to distinguish the hold display 643 and the hold display 633. Furthermore, the start memory is stored, and a hold display 633 is newly generated, for example, when the hold display reaches the upper limit of 4 and overflows, or when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, etc. The display background 640 </ b> A may be switched to high image quality to make it easy for the player to visually recognize. In addition, when the decorative first symbol A to C is stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific symbol (for example, when a pending change symbol or chance eye stops or suggests a pending change), due to the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game The start memory display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

  In addition, the first display mode is not limited to a mode in which the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B is displayed with low image quality, but a mode in which thin view is possible but makes the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B inconspicuous It may be displayed by. For example, another aspect may be displayed in front of the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B (a front layer, upper layer) so as to cover the start storage display background 640A or the background object 640B as a mode to make the background invisible. it can. As another image in this case, for example, an image or a mosaic image which is the same as but thinner than the start memory display background 640A or the background object 640B, the start memory display background 640A of the back (rear layer, lower layer) or the background A transmissive image or the like that allows the object 640B to be viewed can be used. Then, the second display mode is not limited to a mode in which the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with high image quality, and hides another image displayed in front of the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B. You may display in an aspect.

[Screen transition example when predetermined effect occurs in effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserve consumption area 640 will be described. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, which is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641. is there. In the following description of FIGS. 69A and 69B, the description overlapping with FIG. 68 is appropriately omitted.

  (A) of FIG. 69A is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decorative feature variation display game is started.

  In the display screen of the display device 41, the decorative first symbols A to C are stopped and displayed in a plurality of variable display areas 610 with a symbol "2, 4, 5", and the special figure change in progress is performed in the reserve digest area 640 A special figure changing pending display 643 corresponding to the display game is displayed. Also, in the reserve digest area 640, the pedestal 640C of the special view pending display 643 and the low-quality start storage display background 640A are displayed on the back surface of the special view pending display 643 (the lower layer). Ru. The pedestal 640C is displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) of the start memory display background 640A. The start storage display background 640A is narrower in the upper and left regions than the start storage display background 640A of FIG.

  Furthermore, at the lower left end of the display screen of the display device 41, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying an effect relating to the special figure variation display game is displayed, and in the effect display area 641 the walking girl whose display mode can be changed by the effect The character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed in a low image quality state. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, a thin line representing the character 641A indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is displayed preferentially to the front (upper layer) rather than the variable display area 610, similarly to the reserve consumption area 640 and the reserve display unit 630. For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the reserve consumption area 640 and the reserve display unit 630, and the display priority order is the same. Also, the character 641A is displayed with priority over the front surface (upper layer) of the effect display area 641. The character 641A and the effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (layers of the same layer), that is, in an integral manner. In addition, the character 641A may be displayed preferentially over the reserve digestion area 640 or the front surface (upper layer) of the reserve display unit 630, and conversely, the reserve digestion area 640 or the reserve display unit 630 is prioritized over the front face of the character 641A. You may display it. Thus, the priority order of display can be changed as appropriate.

  (G) of FIG. 69A is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed corresponding to the special figure variation pending display 643. FIG. In the plurality of variable display areas 610, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed ("↓") in a normal fluctuation mode.

  Here, the low-quality character 641A may be displayed as another character (another character different from the high-quality character 641B described later) different from the one shown in FIG. 69A. Also, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the low-quality character 641A may be a sleeping aspect with respect to the standing aspect of FIG. 69A, or a walking aspect of FIG. 69A. It may be a mode that is stationary. Note that the character 641A is in a standing still state before the decoration special figure variation display game is started ((69) of FIG. 69A), and after the start of the decoration special figure variation display game (FIG. 69A) ()) May be walking and operating.

  In (G) of FIG. 69A, the character 641A of the effect display area 641 generates a character 641B due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, pending change, pre-notice notice, occurrence of advance notice, etc.) during execution of the special view variation display game. It is a display screen of the display apparatus 41 when changing. The character 641 B is a girl who enjoys eating rice balls that suggest high expectation, and is displayed in high quality. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, a thick line representing the character 641B indicates that the character 641B is displayed in a high quality state. In addition, the start memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, the holding and digesting area 640, and the effect display area 641 are also displayed in a high quality state. In addition, specifically, when the character 641A (641B) partially intrudes into the start storage display background 640A and acts on the suspension display during special feature fluctuation 643 or the suspension display, or the predetermined storage condition, the start storage display background 640A In the case of executing the on-hold change effect such as waiting until the timing of acting on the on-hold display 643 and on the on-hold display 633 displayed in the vicinity of the. Then, the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the switching to the high quality character 641B is performed when the character 641A moves toward the start storage display background 640A or when displayed near the start storage display background 640A. it can. The character 641A may switch to the high-quality character 641B when acting on the special display changing hold display 643 or the hold display, when the character 641A moves toward the start storage display background 640A, or the start storage display background The character may be switched to the high-quality character 641 B at the start of the next special-image variation display game or the like when displayed near 640 A.

  Here, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed as a character different from that shown in (G) of FIG. 69A (another character different from the low-quality character 641A described later). In addition, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in (G) of FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the high-quality character 641B may be one in which the walking speed (operating speed) is increased from (ki) in FIG. 69A. In FIG. 69A, the low-quality character 641A may stand still, and in FIG. 69A, the high-quality character 641B may be walked and operated.

  In FIG. 69A, the display of the display 41 is shown when the special symbol variation display game in progress is over and the stop symbol of the variation display area 610 becomes the disengaging stop symbol (“3, 7, 2”). It is a screen. While the special display changing pending display 643 is digested and not displayed, the start memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a low image quality state. Also, the character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low quality state. After that, the start memory is stored, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started.

  In FIG. 69, the display of the display device 41 in the case where the special figure variation display game in progress is over and the stop symbol of the variation display area 610 becomes the big hit stop symbol (“3, 3, 3”) It is a screen. Below the variation display area 610, the characters "big hit !!" are displayed. While the special view changing hold display 643 is digested and not displayed, the start memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, and the effect display area 641 maintain the high image quality state. In addition, the effect display of the girl who is pleased to eat the rice ball of the character 641B is also maintained as it is. Thereafter, the game of the big hit round is started, and the big hit round effect is executed.

[Another screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 69B, another example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserve consumption area 640 will be described. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order according to the fifth embodiment, and the entire game when a predetermined effect is generated in the storage area 640 or the effect display area 641. It is another example of the screen transition of.

  69B is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special view variation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, a preliminary effect etc.) occurs in the effect display area 641 from (ki) in FIG. 69A. is there. Due to the generation of the predetermined effect, the character 641A of the effect display area 641 changes to a character 641B that suggests that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed in high image quality. On the other hand, the start memory display background 640A of the reserved digestion area 640 and the pedestal 640C maintain the display in the low image quality state. After that, if the stop symbol of the variable display area 610 becomes a disengaging stop symbol (for example, "3, 7, 2"), the process proceeds to (A) of Fig. 69A and a big hit stop symbol (for example, "3, 3, 3" If it becomes), the process proceeds to (Fig. 69A). When a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be displayed preferentially to the front (upper layer) rather than the hold region 640. By doing this, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and the effect of the character 641B can be emphasized. In addition, according to the announcement effect, when the decorative first symbols A to C in the variation display area 610 reach the reach, or the player responds to the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. It can be generated, for example, when the effect button 25 is operated.

  In (G ′ ′) of FIG. 69B, the display in the special view fluctuation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, the in-digestion holding change, the advance notice, etc.) occurs in the holding digestion area 640 from (K) in FIG. 69A. 7 is a display screen of the device 41. Due to the occurrence of a predetermined effect, the special display during change display 643 changes to a star-shaped display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the display of the pedestal 640C, the special view changing hold display 643 and the start storage display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A of the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed as it is, and the display of the effect display area 641 and the character 641A in a low image quality state is maintained. Note that the shape of the pedestal 640C is related to the display mode of the special display during the suspension display 643 such as a crescent moon corresponding to the change of the suspension during the special channel change display 643 to the display mode of the star shape. It may be changed to a certain shape. After that, when the stop symbol of the variable display area 610 becomes a disengaging stop symbol (for example, "372"), it proceeds to (A) of Fig. 69A, and when it becomes a big hit stop symbol (for example, "333") Go to

  When a predetermined effect is generated in the holding region 640, the holding region 640 may be displayed preferentially to the front (upper layer) rather than the effect display region 641. By doing this, for example, the reserve digestion area 640 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and changes in the display mode of the special view during suspension display 643 and the reserve display 633 can be emphasized.

  In addition, when the predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640 c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the hold change, the pedestal 640 c also has high image quality as in the special view fluctuation hold display 643. However, the degree of high image quality may be made lower than the special display fluctuation pending display 643 (the image quality may be made lower than the special display fluctuation pending display 643). As described above, even if the image quality of the pedestal 640c is reduced relatively to the image quality of the reserve display 643 during the special figure change, the player can easily gaze at the special view change reserve display 643 which is the main part of the effect. Processing burden can be reduced while maintaining the interest of

  On the other hand, when the predetermined effect is generated, for example, when the pedestal 640 c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the hold change, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640 c It may be made higher (it is made to have a higher image quality than the special view changing hold display 643). Unexpectedness is caused by the relatively low image quality holding display 643 being displayed with relatively low image quality on the high-quality pedestal 640c, and rather the special drawing fluctuation holding display 643 is highlighted to make the game interesting. Can be improved.

  Furthermore, the pedestal 640 c may be configured to maintain low image quality when the special view changing hold display 643 has high image quality. It is sufficient if the pedestal 640 c has a function to indicate that the decoration of the special view changing hold display 643 and the special view changing hold display 643 is a hold during digestion, and the function is maintained even if it is displayed with low image quality. It is

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is a variable display game (special figure change display game) based on a plurality of identification information (identification symbol, decoration special symbol, decoration first symbol A to C) based on establishment of start condition. A displayable display device 41 is provided, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, special result mode), it is possible to generate a special game state advantageous to the player. The gaming machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41 prior to the variable display game with start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory which becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. A start storage display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing control to display a start storage display (a special display fluctuating display 643, a hold display 633) corresponding to the start storage in the start storage display area; Prepare. The start storage display control means displays the start storage display background 640A in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) on the back surface of the start storage display so as to overlap with the start storage display in the start storage display area. Based on this, the start storage display background 640A can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, the start memory display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the display mode of the start memory display changes. In this case, the start storage display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, for example, if there is no pedestal 640c, there is a problem that the suspension display 643 may appear to be mixed with the first symbol A to C etc. during the special figure change, but it is necessary to make the player recognize the start memory display In this case, it is easy to visually recognize when it is necessary, and it is possible to improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduce the processing burden such as graphics when there is relatively little need for the player to visually recognize (such as when the expectation is low). it can. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement of the visibility to the player and improvement of the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduction of the processing burden, and in the gaming machine, the way of displaying the start memory display area is improved. be able to. Also, for example, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the start memory display, the identification information (decorative first symbol A to C) of the variable display area 610 to be relatively conspicuous is better than the start memory display. Since the image is displayed in high quality, the player can easily recognize the identification information. In addition, since the start memory display background 640A is displayed with low image quality in other cases, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is important information in the start memory display area, and an image of the display screen on the liquid crystal Can be suppressed.

  An effect control means capable of executing control to display effects related to the variable display game in the effect display area 641 which is displayed on the display device 41 in priority to the variable display game (special view fluctuation display game) The presentation control device 300) is further provided. The effect control means displays the effect in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the effect display area 641, and can switch the effect to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, there is a problem that the effect display area 641 may appear to be mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C etc., but the start memory display (the special display changing hold display 643, Not only the hold display 633) but also the effect display area 641 can be displayed easily for the player to visually recognize when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the same effect as the above-described effect can be exhibited.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment displays the effect game (the decoration special view fluctuation display game) corresponding to the fluctuation display game (the fluctuation display game in the collective display device 50) on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the start condition. The effect game means (effect control device 300) which can be executed, the specific display area (effect display area 641) displayed with priority over the effect game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41, and the specific display And display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display control of the specific characters (characters 641A, 641B) displayed in the area. The display control means (effect control device 300) displays the specific display area in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the normal state, and displays the specific character in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality). The specific display area can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode based on the establishment, and the specific character can be switched to a second effect mode (for example, high image quality).

  Therefore, when there is relatively little need for the player to visually recognize, the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) and the specific character is displayed in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality) ), Thereby improving the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reducing the processing load of the graphic etc. of the display control means (effect control device 300). Conversely, when it is necessary to make the player visually recognize (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) Switch the specific character from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality) to make the player visually recognize the specific display area (effect display area 641) and the specific character (characters 641A, 641B) It can be easy.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. FIG. The present embodiment relates to the driver 150 (here, the LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial setting. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt process of the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71) is initialized after the state display edit output process (A1318). The feature is that the LED driver initial setting process (A15001) to be set is added. In addition, after the initial setting of the LED driver 153, an LED data transmission process (A16001) for setting an output mode of the LED driver 153, that is, a display mode of the state display device 152 is performed. In the present embodiment, after the configuration of the LED driver 153 is described, initial setting processing of the LED driver 153 and LED data transmission processing will be described.

  The order of the LED driver initial setting process (A15001) and the LED data transmission process (A16001) may be switched. In this case, the LED driver initial setting process (A15001) initializes the LED driver 153 for the LED data transmission process (A16001) in the next timer interrupt process.

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. The LED driver 153 of this embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. Further, the collective driver 153a, the duty ratio driver 153b, and the ball-out rate / discharge ball number driver 153c described later are also the same as the LED driver 153.

  The LED driver 153 is a display 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1), 900-) of the digit sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method). The LED of 0 (digit 0)) is energized and lights up. The digit display 900 constituting the status display device 152 includes a group of eight dot-shaped LED lamps in addition to a seven-segment (or eight-segment) type. The LED driver 153 may be either common anode or common cathode.

  When the LED driver 153 is the duty ratio driver 153 b or the output ball ratio / discharged ball number driver 153 c, as indicated by the dotted line, the LED driver 153 at the previous stage (the collective driver 153 a for the first stage or the second stage A 16-bit command is transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the ratio driver 153 b). When the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, a 16-bit command is directly transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 without the intervention of the LED driver 153 at the previous stage.

  The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163, a 16-bit latch circuit 164, a latch selector 165, four 8-bit latches (latch circuits: digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) 167a to 167d, and a control unit 173. And an oscillator 174, a 4-to-1 data selector 183, a character generator (decoder) 185, a 2-to-1 data selector 187, a segment driver 193, and a digit driver 195. Control unit 173 includes number-of-digits setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176, data selection unit 177, and standby mode setting unit 178. The oscillating unit 174 generates and transmits a signal used in the control unit 173 (in particular, the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). The 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Furthermore, the LED driver 153 may include an emission color control unit that controls the emission color of the LED (or segment).

  The 16-bit command is input from the data input terminal to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153, and can be output from the data output terminal to the other LED driver 153 as it is. The data of the 16-bit shift register 163 is held (set) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 at the timing (latch timing) at which the 16-bit latch circuit 164 receives a latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111. ).

  Among the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the upper 8 bits are sent to the latch selector 165, the number-of-digits setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178. Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data portion) are sent to the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. In addition, the lower 8 bits of data (only necessary bits (for example, 4 bits) may be sent) are also sent to the number of digits setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178.

  When the upper 8 bits (address portion) indicate the address (for example, 21H (hexadecimal number)) of the digit number setting unit 175, the digit number setting unit 175 controls data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 (initial The lower 8 bits (or only necessary bits) of the setting data) are taken in, and the corresponding digit number (for example, X0H to X3H (hexadecimal expression, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). The number of digits set is the number of digits (number of digits) of the display 900 driven by the LED driver 153, and is four in the present embodiment.

  When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of duty setting unit 176 (for example, 20H (hexadecimal expression)), duty setting unit 176 includes control data (initial setting data) held in 16-bit latch circuit 164. The lower 8 bits (or only necessary bits) are taken in, and corresponding duty ratios (for example, X0H to XFH (hexadecimal expression, X is arbitrary)) are set (initial setting). The duty ratio indicating the brightness (emission intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display 900 corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. The source driver corresponds to the digit driver 195 in the case of anode common, and corresponds to the segment driver 193 in the case of cathode common.

  When the upper 8 bits indicate the address (for example, 27H (hexadecimal notation)) of the data selection unit 177, the data selection unit 177 determines the lower 8 bits (necessary of the control data stored in the 16-bit latch circuit 164). (Only one bit can be used) and the use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. The addresses of the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting unit 175 may be the same, and setting of use / non-use of decoded data by the data selection unit 177 and digit number setting of the digit number setting unit 175 may be performed simultaneously ( The data selection unit 177 and the number-of-digits setting unit 175 are distinguished by lower 8 bits).

  That is, the data selection unit 177 selects whether the data of the 8-bit latch is decoded by the character generator 185 and used as decoded data or whether the data of the 8-bit latch is used as non-decoded data as it is. When decoded, the data of the 8-bit latch is regarded as a character code and is decoded into lighting pattern data of a character. The data selection unit 177 sends a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data to the 2-to-1 data selector 187 when using data of the 8-bit latch as it is as non-decoded data. As described above, the data selection unit 177 can set the presence / absence of use of the decoding function based on a command (including a command and control data) from the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 111).

  When the upper 8 bits indicate an address of standby mode setting unit 178 or a command for standby mode setting unit 178 (for example, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexadecimal expression: X is arbitrary), etc.), standby mode setting unit 178 Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (or only necessary bits) are taken. Then, for example, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to turn off the segment drive unit 193 or the digit drive unit 195 to shift the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H), segment drive unit 193 and the digit driver 195 are forcibly turned off to turn off the display 900 for all digits (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), the segment driver 193 of the LED driver 153 and the digit driver 195 are dynamically driven. To operate normally (in the case of 1 × H). In the standby mode, each setting is not cleared, and the previous setting is held. Also, in normal operation, once segment drive unit 193 and digit drive unit 195 are driven, data in the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected on the display of display 900 simply by storing the data in the 8-bit latch. Ru.

  When the upper eight bits indicate the address (for example, 22H (hexadecimal notation)) of the 8-bit latch 167a, the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to the 8-bit latch 167a. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and sets (sets) lighting pattern data or character code of lower 8 bits (data portion). Similarly, when the upper 8 bits indicate an address (for example, 23H, 24H, 25H (hexadecimal notation)) of any of 8-bit latches 167b-167d, latch selector 165 selects 8-bit latch 167b corresponding to the address. Transfer the latch signal to any of 167d. As a result, the 8-bit latches 167b to 167d can latch and capture lighting pattern data or a character code of lower 8 bits (data portion) addressed to itself.

  Note that a latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111 is input to the latch selector 165, and the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to any one of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d to obtain 8 bits. One of the latches 167a-167d is selected. The 8-bit latches 167a to 167d can respectively hold display data for the display 900 for digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3 addressed to itself.

  The 4-to-1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d corresponding to the digit line of each digit selected by the digit driver 195 in order to realize the dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting method). Do. The 4-to-1 data selector 183 outputs data of any one of the selected 8-bit latches 167a-167d to the character generator 185 and the 2-to-1 data selector 187. The digit line is selected by outputting an on / off drive signal to the digit line. In the case of the anode common, the on voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of the cathode common, the current drawing voltage (off voltage) to the digit line ) Is applied. Information indicating which digit line is selected by the digit driver 195 may be transmitted to the 4-to-1 data selector 183.

  For example, when the digit drive unit 195 outputs a drive signal to select the digit line of digit 0, the data of the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, when digit drive unit 195 outputs a drive signal to select digit lines of digit 1, digit 2 and digit 3, data of 8-bit latches 167b, 167c and 167d are respectively selected.

  The character generator 185 decodes the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183. When the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 decodes the character code (character code) by the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. Convert to

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a character code (character code) and a lighting pattern of a character corresponding to the character code. In FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code “X10... B” corresponds to lighting pattern data in the case of lighting the decimal point (Dp). Although it can be defined variously as to which character code the character is associated with, the character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines the correspondence between the character code (input) and the character (output) (lighting pattern data of the character) And so on. For example, the character code "X0011010B" corresponds to the character "-", and lighting pattern data ((a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) = (0) to light (turn on) only the segment g. , 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0)) (e.g. "00000010B"). In order to use the non-decoding data, the batch driver 153a uses the lighting pattern data (for example, "00000010B") transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 as it is when lighting (turning on) only the segment g. .

  The description returns to the description with reference to FIG. If the LED driver 153 is the duty ratio driver 153 b or the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c, the character code transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latch 167 a-167 d, so the character generator A step 185 outputs lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, since the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is already held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d, except for the accidental case, The character generator 185 only converts appropriate lighting pattern data into inappropriate lighting pattern data by decoding processing. If the appropriate lighting pattern data accidentally matches any of the character codes, the character generator 185 of the batch driver 153a may output lighting pattern data of a character.

  The 2-to-1 data selector 187 directly outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the 4-to-1 data selector 183 in response to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177. Any one of the undecoded data to be selected is selected and output to the segment drive unit 193. The non-decoding data is data output from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 without passing through the character generator 185, and is 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. When a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoding data is input, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 outputs non-decoding data, and when no data selection signal is input, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 outputs decoding data.

  If the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 receives the data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoding data, and always holds the appropriate lighting pattern held in the 8-bit latch 167a-167d. Data will be output to the segment driver 193. On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is the duty ratio driver 153 b or the ball ratio / discharged ball number driver 153 c, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 does not receive the data selection signal, and the character (character) is always lit. The pattern data (decoded data) is output to the segment drive unit 193.

  The segment drive unit 193 outputs lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decoded data) from the 2-to-1 data selector 187 to the display 900 for the digit corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit drive unit 195 (see FIG. Dynamic drive system). The lighting pattern data is on / off data of the light emission of the eight LEDs (segment ag, Dp or eight LEDs in the form of dots) of the display 900 of the selected digit (i.e., the selected digit line). In the case of the common anode, the segment drive section 193 applies the current draw voltage (off voltage) to the segment line as a drive voltage to turn the LED on (light emission state). In the case of the cathode common, the LED is turned on (light emission state) by applying an on voltage as a drive voltage to the segment line.

  The eight LEDs of the display 900 are segments ag and Dp in the display 900 of the seven-segment type (including the dot portion). On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 34A, the eight LEDs of the display 900 are a group of eight LED lamps in a dot shape (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) or eight LED lamps in a dot shape. (D9, D11-D16, D17).

  The digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal to select a digit line of each digit. The digit driver 195 applies, as a drive signal, an on voltage to the digit line in the case of the anode common, and applies a current drawing voltage (off voltage) to the digit line in the case of the cathode common.

  The resistor connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) is a segment connected by a constant current circuit including the segment drive unit 193 and the segment drive unit 193 by connecting one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND). The value of the current flowing through the line can be set. Thereby, a common current value can be supplied to all the LEDs.

  Furthermore, a light emission color control unit (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the light emission color of the LED (or segment). In the main processing and timer interrupt processing, the light emission color control unit receives a command (control data) relating to the color of the LED and sends a command signal to the segment drive unit 193 to control the light emission color of the LED Can. The segment drive unit 193 applies a drive voltage to the segment line of the color according to the command signal from the light emission color control unit to drive. Segment lines are provided for the LEDs (or segments) of the respective colors of the display 900.

  As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment is initialized in the main process. At this time, initial setting is performed on the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the driver 150 (LED driver 153) and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, at least one of the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 is also initialized in the timer interrupt process. As a result, even after the main processing, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes indefinite due to noise or the like, the driving data (LED command) is output after being set to the correct setting value in the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to avoid turning off due to noise or the like of the status display device 152. In addition, when the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (and the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initialized in timer interrupt processing, omit the initialization (A1016) in the main processing. Can. In the sixth embodiment, the case of performing initial setting on the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 will be described as an example.

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a relation between an initial setting command and a latch transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 is an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 ((digit is an initial setting value of digit number) (16 bits) (FIG. 74), The initial setting data (due) ((d) is an initial set value of the duty ratio) (8 bits) for the duty setting section 176 is transmitted in order including an initial setting command (due) (16 bits) (FIG. 74) including 8 bits.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initialization command (16 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. Thus, the initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 by the initial setting command (digit). Be done. Then, the next initial setting command (due) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 by the next latch signal, and the initial setting data (due) is stored in the duty setting unit 176 by the initial setting command (due). Be done. In FIG. 73, although the initial setting command for the number-of-digits setting unit 175 is transmitted before the initial setting command for the duty setting unit 176, the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 of FIG. 70) according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of an LED driver initial setting process according to the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, the LED driver 153 is the ratio driver 153 b, and the character code (8 bits) stored in the ratio driver 153 b is the character ratio display data.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an initial setting command (digit) relating to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and generates a clock. It transmits with a signal (A15003). Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (due) relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 (A15004), and transmits the initial setting command (due) in the same manner as described above (A15005).

[Transmission timing chart of LED command]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED command and the latch transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 75, the LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (16 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command.

  The first LED command (digit 0) is held by the first latch signal in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the feature ratio display data (digit 0) in the 8-bit latch 167a by the LED command (digit 0). Is stored. Similarly, in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the second LED command (digit 1) is held by the second latch signal, and in accordance with the LED command (digit 1), the feature ratio display data (digit 1) is stored. The third LED command (digit 2) is held by the third latch signal in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and the duty ratio display data (digit 2) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c by the LED command (digit 2). It is memorized. The fourth LED command (digit 3) is held by the fourth latch signal in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and the duty ratio display data (digit 3) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d by the LED command (digit 3). It is memorized.

[LED data transmission process]
The LED driver transmission process according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of an LED data transmission process according to the sixth embodiment. The gaming microcomputer 111 first generates an LED command (digit 0) (16 bits) including the character ratio display data (digit 0) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and the LED command (digit 0). ) Is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) including the character ratio display data (digit 1) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) as described above. (A16011). The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 2) including character ratio display data (digit 2) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c (A16015), and transmits the LED command (digit 2) (A16017) ). The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 3) including character ratio display data (digit 3) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d (A16021), and transmits the LED command (digit 3) (A16023) ). In FIG. 76, LED commands (feature ratio display data = character code) are transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, but the transmission order can be set arbitrarily.

[Cascade connection of LED drivers according to the first modification]
FIG. 77 shows the details of the cascade connection of the LED driver 153 (the ratio driver 153 b and the output ball rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c) according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the duty ratio driver 153 b constitutes a first stage, and the ball-out rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c constitutes a second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the duty ratio driver 153b, and is directly transmitted from the duty ratio driver 153b to the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c. Ru. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data and character code (character code) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are sequentially transmitted to the ratio driver 153 b and the ball withdrawal rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c. Be done. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and a character code in a serial manner using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 transmits the clock signal and the latch signal (load signal) in parallel (parallel) to the duty ratio driver 153 b and the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c.

[Status display device]
FIG. 78A is a diagram showing the details of the character ratio display section 68 displaying the character ratio. The character ratio display unit 68 in the status display unit 152 is a display in which four 7-segment type (8-segment types including point portions) indicators 900 are arranged in the horizontal direction. , A four-digit seven-segment display 900 showing two digits and three digits. The character ratio display unit 68 can switch and display the display (for example, "y50.8") of the total character ratio and the display (for example, "r58.4") of the continuous character ratio. Note that digit 3 (the fourth digit from the right) is the letter "y" indicating the overall character ratio (generally used character ratio) or the letter "r" indicating the continuous character ratio. May be displayed.

  The combination ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code, and based on the lighting pattern data The lighting of the display 900 of each digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) of the character ratio display section 68 is controlled. The character code (character product ratio display data) corresponds to the numerical value of each digit of the character product ratio (A1318 in FIGS. 6 and 70) calculated by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100. The combination ratio driver 153 b has a character generator 185 (decoder) that generates lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code from the character code by decoding, and can set use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 In this case, it is set to use decoded data. That is, the duty ratio driver 153 b can set the use / non-use of the decoding function for generating lighting data of the character ratio display unit 68 from the character code.

  FIG. 78 (B) is a view showing details of a discharged ball number display unit 66 that displays the discharged ball number and a pop rate display unit 67 that displays the pop rate. The discharged ball number display unit 66 and the ball out rate display unit 67 in the state display device 152 are obtained by arranging four seven-segment-type (8-segment-type including point portions) displays 900 in the horizontal direction. The display 900 showing the digit 0 from the right, the display 900 showing the digit 1 corresponds to the discharged ball number display unit 66, the display 900 showing the digit 2 from the right, the display 900 showing the digit 3 shows the outfall rate It corresponds to the part 67. Conversely, the display 900 showing digit 0 from the right, the display 900 showing digit 1 correspond to the pop rate display unit 67, the display 900 showing digit 2 from the right, the display 900 showing digit 3 are discharged You may make it respond | correspond to the number display part 66 of balls. The discharged ball number display unit 66 and the pop rate display unit 67 can be displayed simultaneously.

  The payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c (FIG. 77) lights the character (character) indicated by the character code, which is the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the duty ratio driver 153b. It converts to pattern data, and controls lighting of the indicator 900 of each digit of the discharged ball number display unit 66 and the ball out display unit 67 based on the lighting pattern data. The payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c decodes the character code into light pattern data (discharged ball number display data, or popping rate display data) of a character indicated by the character code (a decoder) (decoder When the use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the decoded data is set to be used. That is, the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c can set whether to use the decoding function for generating lighting data of the discharged ball number display unit 66 and the popped rate display unit 67 from the character code.

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to the first modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an initial setting command sent to a driver for a duty ratio and a driver for the rate of balls out / number of discharged balls according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 79, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c, and initial setting data for the digit number setting unit 175 of the duty ratio driver 153 b (8 Bit) transmitted in the form of initial setting command (32 bits) in order of initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the driver for balls out / number of balls discharged, and the driver for the ratio driver 153 b The initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 is transmitted in the order of being included in the initial setting command (32 bits).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it transmits an initial setting command (32 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting data (digit) c is stored in the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. At the same time, initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal.

  Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the initial setting data (d) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the driver for balls out / number of discharged balls 153 c. At the same time, the initial setting data (d) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting process of the driver for the percentage of ejected balls / the number of ejected balls and the driver for the duty ratio]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 of FIG. 70) according to the first modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing a procedure of initial setting processing of a driver for a duty ratio and a driver for the rate of balls out / number of balls discharged according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

  First, the gaming microcomputer 111 performs an initial setting command (digit) c including initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used in the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. Initial setting command (digit) b (16 digits) including initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) relating to the number of used digits of digit number setting unit 175 of combination ratio driver 153 b (A15006) 16 bits) (A15007), initial setting command (digit) c, initial setting command (digit) b concatenated initial setting commands (digits) c, b (32 bits) to serial communication circuit transmission buffer And transmit along with the clock signal (A15009).

  Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 performs an initial setting command (due) c (16 bits) including initial setting data (due) c related to the duty ratio of the duty setting portion 176 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c. Generate an initial setting command (d) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (d) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153 b (A 15011) The initial setting commands (d) c, b (32 bits) connected in the order of the setting command (d) c and the initial setting command (d) b are transmitted as described above (A15014).

[Transmission timing chart of LED command according to the first modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an LED command sent to the driver for the duty ratio and the driver for the ball out rate / the number of discharged balls according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the duty ratio driver 153b is character product ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c is discharged. It is the ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the ball ratio display data (digit 2, digit 3). In FIG. 81, the LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 stores the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate / discharged ball driver 153c, and the 8-bit latch 167a of the duty ratio driver 153b. These are generated and transmitted as LED command (32 bits) included in order of feature ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits) to be stored, and then, driver 153 c for ball out rate / discharge ball number These are displayed in the order of the discharged ball number display data (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b and the character ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the duty ratio driver 153b. It generates and sends it in the form of being included in LED command (32 bits).

  Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (32 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the discharged ball rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. Also, at the same time, the item ratio display data (digit 0) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the part ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal.

  Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharged ball number display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the discharged ball rate / discharged ball driver 153 c. At the same time, the item ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the combination ratio driver 153 b.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 81, thereafter, the ball game rate display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the game ball percentage / discharged ball number driver 153 c, although the gaming microcomputer 111 And the character ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the duty ratio driver 153b in the order of including these in the command (32 bits) and transmitting them, and then Ball ratio display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the ratio / discharge ball number driver 153c, and feature ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the ratio driver 153b These are generated and transmitted by including them in a command (32 bits) in the order of 3) b.

  Therefore, the ball exit rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the ball exit rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c according to the next latch signal. At the same time, the character ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal.

  Further, the ball exit rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the ball out rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the character ratio display data (digit 3) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the LED command (digit 3) b.

[LED data transmission process according to the first modification]
The LED driver transmission process according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of an LED data transmission process according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 first executes an LED command (digit 0) c (carriage 0) c (8 bits) containing the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the payout rate / discharged ball driver 153 c. 16 bit) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the quotient ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the duty ratio driver 153 b is generated (A16003), Write LED commands (digit 0) c, b (32 bits) concatenated in the order of LED command (digit 0) c and LED command (digit 0) b to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and send it along with the clock signal A16006).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) c including the discharged ball number display data (digit 1) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout rate / discharged ball driver 153c (A16008) , LED command (digit 1) b including character ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in 8-bit latch 176 b of combination ratio driver 153 b (A16009), LED command (digit 1) c, LED The LED commands (digit 1) c and b connected in the order of the command (digit 1) b are transmitted as described above (A16012).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 2) c including the payout rate display data (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c (A16014) , LED command (digit 2) b including character ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in 8-bit latch 176 c of combination ratio driver 153 b (A 16015), LED command (digit 2) c, LED The LED commands (digit 2) c and b connected in the order of command (digit 2) b are transmitted as described above (A16018).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 3) c including the payout rate display data (digit 3) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c (A16020) , LED command (digit 3) b including character ratio display data (digit 3) b to be stored in 8-bit latch 176 d of combination ratio driver 153 b (A 16021), LED command (digit 3) c, LED The LED commands (digit 3) c and b connected in the order of command (digit 3) b are transmitted as described above (A16024).

[Game Control Device According to Second Modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a gaming machine according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment. The game control apparatus 100 according to the sixth embodiment is similar to the game control apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment, but the state display device 152 attached to the game control apparatus 100 is incorporated in the collective display device 50. It has become. In the game control apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, the batch driver 153a, the ratio driver 153b, and the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c are cascade-connected in that order by the data signal line, and the gaming microcomputer 111 The data signal lines extending from the point are connected to the batch driver 153a.

[Cascade connection of LED drivers according to the second modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of LED drivers according to a second modified example of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the batch driver 153a constitutes a first stage, the duty ratio driver 153b constitutes a second stage, and the ball-out rate / discharged ball number driver 153c constitutes a third stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is transmitted to the batch driver 153a, and is transmitted from the batch driver 153a to the ratio driver 153b as it is. Then, the serial data transmitted to the duty ratio driver 153 b is transmitted from the duty ratio driver 153 b to the ball withdrawal rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c as it is. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code) and the like transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are, in order, the batch driver 153a, the ratio driver 153b, the payout rate / discharge ball number It is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and a character code in a serial manner using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 transmits a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel (parallel) to the batch driver 153a, the duty ratio driver 153b, and the payout rate / discharged ball count driver 153c.

  The collective driver 153 a controls lighting of the collective display unit (not shown) in accordance with the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. The collective driver 153a is a 7-segment type (8-segment type including point portion) display 900 (LED lamp), and the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (D1) is a display unit 900 of digit 0, the second The special view variation display unit 52 (D2) is controlled as the display 900 of the digit 1 (see FIG. 2B and the like).

  The collective driver 153a originally controls the 4-digit 7-segment (including 8-point, including 8-point type) display unit 900 itself, but a variation display unit 53 for a common drawing variation display game, The round display unit 60 and eight dotted LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the first gaming state display unit 57 are regarded as the segments (a-g, Dp) of the indicator 900 of the second digit. Control (see FIG. 2B etc.). In addition, the collective driver 153a includes a hold storage display unit (a special display 1 reserve display 54, a special view 2 reserve display 55, a general drawing reserve display 56), a second gaming state display 58, and a third gaming state. The dot-like eight LED lamps (D9, D11-D16, D17) of the display unit 59 are regarded as the segments (a-g, Dp) of the indicator 900 of the digit 3 and controlled (see FIG. 2B etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the batch driver 153a is actually the LED driver 153 (same IC) of the same type as the combination ratio driver 153b and the withdrawal rate / discharge ball number driver 153c, but the batch driver Although 153 a has the character generator 185, it is set so as not to use decoded data by the character generator 185 (non-use setting).

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to the second modification]
FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an initial setting command sent to the driver for batch, the driver for duty ratio, and the driver for ball out rate / discharged ball count according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 sets initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c, and initial setting data for the digit number setting unit 175 of the duty ratio driver 153 b (8 Bit) and initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a are transmitted in the form of being included in a command (48 bits) in order and duty setting of the driver for balls out / number of balls discharged 153c. Initial setting data (digits) c (8 bits) for the unit 176, initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b, and for the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a The initial setting data (digits) a (8 bits) are transmitted in the order of being included in the command (48 bits).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initial setting command (48 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting data (digit) c is stored in the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. At the same time, initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal. Furthermore, at the same time, the initial setting data (digit) a is stored in the number-of-digits setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

  Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the initial setting data (d) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the driver for balls out / number of discharged balls 153 c. At the same time, the initial setting data (d) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal. Furthermore, at the same time, the initial setting data (due) a is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

[Initial setting process of driver for delivery rate / discharged ball number, driver for duty ratio, driver for batch]
The LED driver initial setting process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing a procedure of initial setting processing of the driver for batch, the driver for duty ratio, and the driver for balls out / number of discharged balls according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

  First, the gaming microcomputer 111 performs an initial setting command (digit) c including initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) relating to the number of digits used in the digit number setting unit 175 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. Initial setting command (digit) b (16 digits) including initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) relating to the number of used digits of digit number setting unit 175 of combination ratio driver 153 b (A15006) 16 bits), and includes initial setting data (digits) a (8 bits) related to the number of digits used of the digit number setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a (16 bits) a (16 bits) ) (A15008), initial setting commands (digits) c, initial setting commands (digits) b, and initial setting commands (digits) a are concatenated in order of initial setting commands (digits) c, b, a (48 bits) ) Is transmitted together with a clock signal written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit (A15010).

  Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 performs an initial setting command (due) c (16 bits) including initial setting data (due) c related to the duty ratio of the duty setting portion 176 of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c. Generate an initial setting command (d) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (d) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153 b (A 15011), and collectively (A 15012) The initial setting command (d) a (16 bits) including the initial setting data (d) a related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153a is generated (A15013), the initial setting command (d) c, the initial Initial setting commands (d) c, b connected in the order of setting command (d) b, initial setting command (d) a a transmitting (48 bits) similar to that described above in (A15015).

[Transmission timing chart of LED command according to the second modification]
FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the driver for batch, the driver for duty ratio, and the driver for ball out rate / discharged ball count according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the duty ratio driver 153b is character product ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c is discharged. It is the ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the ball ratio display data (digit 2, digit 3). In addition, lighting pattern data (digit 0-digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as "lighting data") is stored in the collective driver 153a. In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 is a character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout rate / discharged ball driver 153c and a character stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the duty ratio driver 153b. LED commands (digit 0) c, b, a (digit 0) b (8 bits) and lighting data (digit 0) a (8 bits) to be stored in 8-bit latch 167 a of batch driver 153 a Character code (digit 1) c (8 bits) to be generated and transmitted in the form of being included in 48 bits) and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the out-drop-rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c Character code (digit 1) b (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167 b of driver 153 b, stored in 8-bit latch 167 b of batch driver 153 a That lighting data (column 1) and these LED commands in the order of a (8 bits) (digit 1) c, b, and transmits the generated in a form included in a (48-bit).

  Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (48 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the discharged ball rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. Also, at the same time, the item ratio display data (digit 0) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the part ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal. At the same time, lighting data (digit 0) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the batch driver 153 a by the latch signal.

  Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharged ball number display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the discharged ball rate / discharged ball driver 153 c. At the same time, the item ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the part ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal. At the same time, lighting data (digit 1) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the batch driver 153 a by the latch signal.

  Although not shown in FIG. 87, the game microcomputer 111 thereafter stores the character code (digit 2) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c. Character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167 c of ratio driver 153 b, and lighting data (digit 2) a (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167 c of batch driver 153 a The character code generated and transmitted in the form of being included in the LED command (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits), and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the drop rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c (Digit 3) c (8 bits), Character code (Digit 3) b (8 bits) stored in 8-bit latch 167 d of duty ratio driver 153 b, batch dry These LED commands (digit 3) c in the order of lighting data stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of 153a (digit 3) a (8 bits), b, and transmits the generated in a form included in a (48-bit).

  Therefore, the outfall rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the outfall rate / discharged ball number driver 153c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the item ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the combination ratio driver 153 b. At the same time, lighting data (digit 2) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the batch driver 153 a by the latch signal.

  Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the outfall rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the outfall rate / discharged ball number driver 153 c. At the same time, the character ratio display data (digit 3) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the duty ratio driver 153 b by the latch signal. At the same time, lighting data (digit 3) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the batch driver 153 a according to the latch signal.

[LED data transmission process according to the second modification]
The LED driver transmission process according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of an LED data transmission process according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 first performs an LED command (digit 0) c (carriage 0) c (8 bits) including the discharged ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 a of the payout rate / discharged ball driver 153 c 16 bits) are generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the character ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the duty ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003), The LED command (digit 0) a including the lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of the special figure 1 LED) stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the batch driver 153a is generated (A16004). Then, the LED command (digit 0) c, the LED command (digit 0) b, and the LED command (digit 0) a connected in the order of the LED command (digit 0) c, b, a (48 bits) to the serial communication circuit The data is written to the transmission buffer of the above and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16007).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 is an LED command (digit 1) c (16 digits) including discharge ball number display data (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 b of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c. Generate an LED command (digit 1) b including the feature ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176 b of the duty ratio driver 153 b (A 16008), collectively The LED command (digit 1) a including the lighting code (digit 1) a (display data of the special figure 2 LED) stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the driver 153a is generated (A16010). Then, LED commands (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits) connected in the order of LED command (digit 1) c, LED command (digit 1) b, and LED command (digit 1) a are the same as described above. Send (A16013).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 is an LED command (digit 2) c (16) including the payout rate display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c. (A 16014), generate LED command (digit 2) b including character ratio display data (digit 2) b to be stored in 8-bit latch 176 c of combination ratio driver 153 b (A 16015), collectively The LED command (digit 2) a including the lighting code (digit 2) a (general data / round / display data of the first gaming state) stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the driver 153a is generated (A16016). Then, LED commands (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits) connected in the order of LED command (digit 2) c, LED command (digit 2) b, and LED command (digit 2) a are the same as described above Send (A16019).

  The gaming microcomputer 111 is an LED command (digit 3) c (16) including the payout rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167 d of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c. (A 16020), generate LED command (digit 3) b including character ratio display data (digit 3) b to be stored in 8-bit latch 176 d of combination ratio driver 153 b (A 16021), collectively The LED command (digit 3) a including the lighting code (digit 3) a (display data of the hold / second and third gaming states) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176 d of the driver 153a is generated (A16022). Then, LED commands (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) connected in the order of LED command (digit 3) c, LED command (digit 3) b, and LED command (digit 3) a are the same as described above. Send (A16025).

[Operation and effect of the sixth embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control program storage unit (ROM 111 b) for storing a gaming control program (remaining information (program) for gaming control), and a gaming control program (for gaming control) A light emitting unit based on arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing with unchanged information (program) and driving data (LED command) outputted by the arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) And (drive means (LED driver 153) for driving (the object ratio display unit 68). The drive unit (LED driver 153) is provided with a setting unit (number of digits setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) for setting the light emission mode in the light emitting unit (character object ratio display unit 68). Arithmetic processing means (microcomputer 111 for gaming) including a main process (A1001 to control the progress of the game) and an interrupt process (A1301 to A100) which is executed by interrupting the main process (A1001 to 3) every predetermined time Drive means (LED driver 153) for initializing data for initializing the setting unit (the number of digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176) (at least one of the plurality of setting units) in the interrupt processing (A1301) After the transmission (A15001), the drive data (LED command) is transmitted to the drive means (LED driver 153).

  As a result, even after the main processing, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes indefinite due to noise or the like, it becomes possible to return the LED driver 153 to normal in the interrupt processing, and the correct setting value After that, it is possible to output the drive data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid the light-off due to the noise and the like of the status display device 152 (and the batch display device 50).

  In the interrupt process (A1301), after the driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153), at least one of the plurality of setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) It is also possible to transmit initial setting data for initially setting one to the drive means (LED driver 153). In this case, in order to transmit the driving data in the next interrupt process, the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means in the current interrupt process to initialize the setting unit.

  That is, in the interrupt processing (A1301), if the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means together with the driving data, the status display device 152 (and the batch display device) is not based on the transmission order of the driving data and the initial setting data. It is possible to avoid turning off due to the noise of 50) and the like.

  Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (the gaming microcomputer 111) can transmit the initial setting data to the drive means (the LED driver 153) also in the main process (A1001 to A100). As a result, it is possible to prevent the state display device 152 from being turned off even before the interrupt processing is performed.

  Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the setting unit (the number of digits setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176) sets the number of light emitting elements (displays 900) to be emitted in the light emitting unit (character ratio display unit 68). It includes a digit number setting unit 175, and a duty setting unit 176 that sets a duty ratio in the light emitting element (display 900).

  As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes indefinite due to noise or the like, the correct setting value (the number of light emitting elements and their duty ratio (emission intensity, brightness)) It becomes possible to output drive data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off due to noise or the like of the status display device 152 (and the batch display device 50).

  Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is an accessory ratio display unit 68 that displays an accessory ratio. Thus, the item ratio display unit 68 can be reliably displayed in accordance with the game control program even after the main processing.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and alterations are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a combination of multiple embodiments is also possible. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of game machines (slot machines and the like). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 12 front frame (play slot)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first starting winning opening (first starting winning area)
37 Regular fluctuation winning device (2nd start winning area)
39 special fluctuation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 42 setting change device 44 board effect device 44a, 44b internal part (inner movable member)
46 panel decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
80 Lamp Display Device 93 Setting Key Switch 95a External Part (External Movable Member)
102 Set value change switch 143 Probability set value display device 150 Driver 152 State display device 153 LED driver 100 Game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 effect control device (sub board)
400 power supply 630 holding display part 640 holding digestion area 640A start memory display background 641 effect display area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information is executed based on establishment of a start condition and the result of the variable display game is a special result,
A display device capable of executing an effect on the variable display game;
Effect game means capable of executing, on the display device, an effect game corresponding to the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition;
And a display control means capable of executing display control of a specific character displayed in the specific display area, the specific display area being displayed with priority over the effect game on the display device;
The display control means
In the normal state, the specific display area is displayed in the first display mode, and the specific character is displayed in the first effect mode, and the specific display area is different from the first display mode based on establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a display mode and switching the specific character to a second effect mode.

Images